Home

POC2502 Series User Manual

1. Figure 4 9 65 Port Security Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Enable State Display the current per port security status e L2 Entry Num Display the current L2 entry number e Action Display the current action 266 4 9 11 DoS The DoS is short for Denial of Service which is a simple but effective destructive attack on the internet The server under DoS attack will drop normal user data packet due to non stop processing the attacker s data packet leading to the denial of the service and worse can lead to leak of sensitive data of the server Security feature refers to applications such as protocol check which is for protecting the server from attacks such as DoS The protocol check allows the user to drop matched packets based on specified conditions The security features provide several simple and effective protections against Dos attacks while acting no influence on the linear forwarding performance of the switch 4 9 11 1 Global DoS Setting The Global DoS Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 66 amp Figure 4 9 67 appear 267 Global Dos Setting Apply Enabled Disabled Byte 0 655385 Byte 0 65535 Enabled Disabled Netmask Length o sd 0 2 Enabled Disabled Bytes 20 sd 0 1 Enabled Disabled Figure 4 9 66 Global DoS Setting Page Screenshot The page inc
2. IGMP Profile Status Group from Figure 4 7 37 IGMP MLD Profile Status Page Screenshot 187 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current index e IP Type Display the current IP Type e Group from Display the current group from e Group to Display the current group to e Action Display the current action Modif i 4 Click Edit to edit parameter Click Pelete to delete the MLD IGMP profile entry 4 7 7 2 IGMP Filter Setting The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 38 amp Figure 4 7 39 appear Filter Setting Port Select Filter Profile ID Select Pors gt Apply Figure 4 7 38 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Filter Profile ID Select filter profile ID from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Port Filter Status Port Filter Profile ID Action Figure 4 7 39 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot 188 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e Filter Profile ID Display the current filter profile ID e Action Click Show to display detail profile parameter Click Pelete to delete the IGMP filter profile entry 4 7 7 3 MLD Filter Setting The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 40 amp Figure 4 7 41 appear Filter Setting Filter Pro
3. Figure 4 11 2 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot 292 The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry e Port Display the current port e Delete Click Delete to delete static MAC status entry 4 11 2 MAC Filtering By filtering MAC address the switch can easily filter the per configured MAC address and reduce the un safety The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 3 amp Figure 4 11 4 appear MAC Filtering Setting MAC Address VLAN 1 4034 Figure 4 11 3 MAC Filtering Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN 1 4096 Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Buttons Add Click to add new MAC filtering setting 293 Static MAC Status Figure 4 11 4 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry e Delete Delet Click Ele to delete static MAC status entry 4 11 3 Dynamic Address Setting By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds The Dynamic Address Setting Status screens in Figure 4 11 5 Figure 4 11 6 appear Apply Figure 4 11 5 Dynamic Addresses Setting Page Sc
4. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 O i ZA d i O CO N 32 33 23 RG 59 Copper Clad Steel Coaxial Cable as oo O o J v as ee ss 9 9 7 7 6 5 5 Above PoE outputs are based on RG 59 CCS 460 1000FT DC Resistance coaxial cables at 25 C operation me 3 9 4 me 4 9 The PoE output may reduce 1W at high temp operating The long coaxial cable may not support 720P 1080P camera because long coaxial cable has high DC Resistance which reduces data rate bandwidth 24 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the POC Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the POC Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the POC Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring of the POC Managed Switch Figure 2 1 1A 2 1 1B shows the front panel of the POC Managed Switch Front Panel t m POCISOZACIOP 0728 i Bit AA 15 B Port Power over Coax Switch Figure 2 1 1 A POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S Front Panel Front Panel E fs PEOR 16 port Power over Coax Switch SSSISS HHH a 1 SIDI AAS J j Q Figure 2 1 1B POC2502 16CXP 2
5. BPDUs 148 e BPDU Guard e P2P MAC e Migrate Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled By default the system automatically detects the soeed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 65 535 Port Type Ha
6. Figure 4 1 5 POC Managed Switch Main Functions Menu Buttons Click to save changes or reset to default LOGOUT Click to logout the POC Managed Switch REBOOT Click to reboot the POC Managed Switch reses Click to refresh the page 4 1 1 Save Button This save button allows save the running startup backup configuration or reset switch in default parameter The screen in Figure 4 1 6 appears SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH 48 Figure 4 1 6 Save Button Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Save Confiuration to Click to save the configuration For more detailed information please refer to FLASH chapter 4 1 2 e Restore to Default Click to reset switch in default parameter For more detailed information please refer to chapter 4 15 1 4 1 2 Configuration Manager The system file folder contains configuration settings The screen in Figure 4 1 7 appears save Configuration Running configuration Source File Startup configuration Backup configuration Startup configuration O Backup configuration Destination File Apply Figure 4 1 7 Save Button Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Running Configuration Refers to the running configuration sequence use in the switch In switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence running config can be sav
7. IA a MIRAR p T ie AECA Pen n AD Figure 4 2 7 Local User Page Screenshot 96 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username Display the current username e Password Type Display the current password type e Privilege Type Display the current privilege type e Modify Click to modify the local user entry Metis Delete the current user 4 2 5 Time Settings 4 2 5 1 System Time Configure SNTP on this page SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The SNTP Configuration screens in Figure 4 2 8 amp Figure 4 2 9 appear System Time Setting Po Enable SNT SDisable Enable Sree GIA mear 20 on Day Hours Minutes Seconds Hone aving Time 1 1440 Minutes Minutes i Recurring To Un lan O Minutes 0 recurring From 2000 Jan 0 Minutes rring To 2005 Jan CI Minutes 0 Figure 4 2 8 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable SNTP Enabled Enable SNTP mode operation When enabling SNTP mode operation the agent forwards and transfers 57 e Manual Time e Time Zone e Daylight Saving Time e Daylight Saving Time Offset e Recurring From e Recurring To e Non recurring From e Non recurring To SNTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain
8. PD Alive Check PD Alive Check caro Apply PD Alwe Check Configuration Disabled Figure 4 15 5 PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot 337 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function By default all ports are disabled e Ping PD IP Address This column allows user to set PoE device IP address for system making ping to the POE device Please note that the PD s IP address must be set to the same network segment with the PoE Switch e Interval Time 10 300s This column allows user to set how long system should issue a ping request to PD for detecting whether PD is alive or dead Interval time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds e Retry Count 1 5 This column allows user to set the number of times system retries ping to PD For example if we set count 2 it means that if system retries ping to the PD and the PD doesn t response continuously the PoE port will be reset e Action Allows user to set which action will be applied if the PD is without any response The POC2502 PoC Switch offers the following 3 actions E PD Reboot It means system will reset the PoE port that is connected to the PD
9. damage it 330 4 15 2 System Configuration In a power over Ethernet system operating power is applied from a power source PSU power supply unit over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices PDs which are connected to ports Under some conditions the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU The system with a PSU is capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system In order to maintain the function of the majority of the ports power management is implemented The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current The input power consumption is equal to the system s aggregated power consumption The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected When this value is exceeded ports will be deactivated according to user defined priorities The power budget is managed according to the following user definable parameters maximum available power ports priority and maximum allowable power per port Reserved Power There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports E Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power fo
10. e DHCPv6 Client Description Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If it fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also uses the following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 through 128 Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch To enable this POC Managed Switch to accept a configuration from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 DHCPv6 server By default the POC Managed Switch does not perform DHCPVv6 client actions DHCPV6 clients request the delegation of long lived prefixes that they can push to individual local hosts 94 Buttons Appl ld Click to apply changes Pv6 Information Information Name Information Value Auto Configuration Enabled Figure 4 2 5 IPv6 Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Auto Co
11. e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 8 ports to be aggregated at the same time The POC Managed Switch supports Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 8 groups If the group is defined as an LACP static link aggregation group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregation group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports Use the Link Aggregation Menu to display or configure the Trunk function This section has the following items a LAG Setting Configures load balance algorithm configuration settings E LAG Management Configures LAG configuration settings E LAG Port Setting Configures LAG port settings E LACP Setting Configures LACP priority settings E LACP Port Setting Configures LACP configuration settings El LAG Status Displays LAG status LACP information 102 4 4 1 LAG Setting This page allows configuring load balance algorithm configuration settings The LAG Setting screens in Figure 4 4 2 amp Figure 4 4 3 appear LAG Setting MAC Address OIP MAC Address Apply Figure 4 4 2 LAG Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Select load balance algorithm mode Algorithm mM MAC Addres
12. 192168 0 104 295 255 255 0 192 1600 254 NS2500 28745 13 192 168 0147 1321680147 255 255 255 0 192 10 24 POCOS Contes Packel Force Broadcast Figure 3 1 7 IFS Smart Discovery Utility Screen This utility shows all necessary information from the devices such as MAC Address Device Name firmware version and Device IP Subnet address It can also assign new password IP subnet address and description to the devices After setup is completed press the Update Device Update Multi or Update All button to take effect The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown below NW Update Device use the current setting on one single device NW Update Multi use the current setting on multi devices E Update All use the current setting on whole devices in the list The same functions mentioned above also can be found in Option tools bar To click the Control Packet Force Broadcast function it allows you to assign a new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address Press the Connect to Device button and the Web login screen appears in Figure 3 1 4 Press the Exit button to shut down the IFS Smart Discovery Utility 43 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web based management About Web based Management The POC Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the POC Managed Switch from anywher
13. 2 2 Installing the SS Wicca nica a is 29 2 24 DESKIOD INS la ION is a A 29 2 22 ac MOLINO sisi aa id a tia 30 223 Stalling ne SER COIN Ol ias 31 2 2 4 Installing the Long Reach PoE CoMmMunNlicatiON ooccccccnncccccccconnnncnonononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 33 IES WITGH MANAGEIIEN Tiida 38 3 1 PRE CUIFGINGIING scrii porien ana a AAE aaa o aAa Aaa saraa Enea Anai aaa 38 3 2 Management Access OvVervieW dis 39 355 AA MINS ICAO CON Das 40 34 Web Management A bier ee reeetinenenty 41 3 5 SNMP based Network Management ccc scseccccseseeeeeccesseeesceenseeescoesseeescoeaseeeecoeasesesooeaseeesooenseessoneass 42 3 6 IFS SMart DISCOVERY UI ADA 42 4 WEB CONFIGURATION as 44 AV Mail Web Page a 47 Ae Ve te Save DUO dar tenia 48 4 1 2 Configuration Manager siria is A aa Fals 49 AAA SAVING E ONU A ia e el dle do sele bata 50 A e ante nee vate e e a 51 42 System IMPOR ALOR ince sa 51 A o aCe 52 4 2 3 PY OMMGURAN ONY ais dto a e 54 SN A A IN 56 2 O gn neat a ae eAeadteeces 57 42 es SUM WMT et Sree OA cue acteet cee ec utemncc ty mateiae 57 A252 ONTP SEIVENS cunda tatiana Reade nan lc 60 Ac OOO Managemen 23 iiets feces leet heated a a te aleeal atl als a dee eed lala wees 61 AZO Local LO adn 61 Ae G e bocar O MON terse a See een ek Pe eer ar are Pe 62 A 2 63 TREIMOIS SV SIOG tn liarla tedio dnde 64 A 2 OA OG MESSAGE sie a i al E eee na er ee a etna ieee rete neha dlc eal aera
14. 341 4 16 5 Dual Image This page provides information about the active and backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the backup image The web page displays two tables with information about the active and backup firmware images The Dual Image Configuration and Information screens in Figure 4 16 5 amp Figure 4 16 6 appear Dual Image Configuration POC2902 16CAP 27 23 SDK_309 1 507906012 Bix Backup POC2502 16CXAP 2T 2o_WEDTU_V1 90790 05_Dix Active Figure 4 15 5 Dual Image Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Active Image Select the active or backup image Buttons Apply Click to apply active image Images Information Flash Partition image Name POC2502 160XP 2T 25 SDK_305 v1 56150612 bix Image Size 5836126 Bytes Created Tima 2015 06 12 09 34 07 UTC POC2502 16CXP 2T 25_webfu_v1 50150703 b x Image Name POC2502 16CXAP 2 1 25 seba wi 30150703 bix Created Time 2015 07 03 12 23 32 UTC Figure 4 16 6 Dual Image Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Flash Partition Display the current flash partition e Image Name Display the current image name e Image Size Display the current image size e Created Time Display the created time 342 5 SWITCH OPERATION 5 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table is comp
15. RX both Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q tagged based VLAN Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs 802 1ad Q in Q tunneling Voice VLAN Protocol VLAN Private VLAN Protected port GVRP IEEE 802 3ad LACP and static trunk Supports 4 groups of 4 port trunk STP RSTP MSTP IGMP v2 v3 Snooping IGMP Querier Up to 256 multicast groups MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 256 multicast groups IPv4 IPv6 IP based ACL MAC based ACL 8 mapping ID to 8 level priority queues Port number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP field in IP packet Traffic classification based strict priority and WRR IEEE 802 1X Port based authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with RADIUS server RADIUS TACACS user access authentication IP MAC port binding MAC filter Static MAC address DHCP Snooping and DHCP Option 82 STP BPDU guard BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding DoS attack prevention ARP inspection IP source guard 21 Basic Management Interfaces Secure Management Interfaces SNMP MIBs Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance Standards Compliance Environment Operating Storage Web browser Telnet SNMP v1 v2c Firmware upgrade by HTTP TFTP protocol through Ethernet network Remote Local Syslog System log LLDP protocol SNTP SSH SSL SNMP v3 RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1215 Generic Traps RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions RFC 2737 Entity MIB Version 2 R
16. S interlogix He i POC2502 Series User Manual P N 1073045 REV A ISS 27AUG15 Copyright Trademarks and patents Manufacturer Intended use Certification FCC compliance ACMA compliance Canada European Union directives Contact Information O 2015 United Technologies Corporation Interlogix is part of UTC Building Industrial Systems Inc a unit of United Technologies Corporation All rights reserved The POC2502 Series name and logo are trademarks of United Technologies Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Interlogix 3211 Progress Drive Lincolnton NC 28092 USA Authorized EU manufacturing representative UTC Climate Controls amp Security B V Kelvinstraat 7 6003 DH Weert Netherlands Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentation for details For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www interlogix com CE O mus This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not i
17. don t care SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this 288 Buttons Add e Type of Service e ICMP e ICMP Code Click to add ACE list FIN ACE E Set TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry E Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry NW Unset TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry E Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the type pf service for this ACE Any No specifc type of service is specified destination port status is don t care DSCP If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE you can enter a specific DSCP value A field for entering a DSCP value appears The allowed range is 0 to 63 A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value IP Recedence If you want to filter a specific IP recedence with this ACE you can enter a specific IP recedence value A field for entering a IP recedence value appears The allowed range is O to 7 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP recedence value Specify the ICMP for this ACE Any No specifc ICMP is specified destination port status is don t care List If you want to filter a sp
18. specific source IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value When User Defined is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE E Any No destination IP address filter is specified NW User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the destination IP address filter you can enter a specific destination IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value When User Defined is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the source port for this ACE EW Any No specifc source port is specified source port status is don t care NW Single If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE you can enter a specific source port value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value 281 E Range If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific source port range value A field for entering a source port value appears The allow
19. 4 8 5 4 Telephony OUI Port Setting ore a a E A 211 BO SOC UNIV CCOO EOS 213 O PEE BP OG A A E ree tee ee ete eee ee oe 213 4 9 1 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication cccccccseeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseesseeeeeseaaaeees 214 AA A A aa ceeeeccutasan toast 217 EEE yr a 218 4 9 1 4 Guest VLAN Sell ori died 220 49 io AUTEN ALEC HO Sari aa 223 ARRASATE 223 ADS TACA RS ace eeecaencdtenceetaven onty ct eecencandeceeautencsaeeetiancaeceeeaeres 226 a IBAA a ne ren PT ee te Per ee tee eee eRe eer eee ee aN a eee Tee ee ee eee 229 TOONS He caste anes ete e a a ten cacaead te cacteeeeeeane teers pcadoasdecneateeteten ae 230 49A 2 Enable NS tease esi aca a a a 231 OGD ACCO SSos 232 ARCA ROO 232 TESS a A A eee E eee 233 A 235 A IN 237 4 9 6 Management Access MEMO das 238 A aa a a a A a a a a bisaeSnqeddsaaaneceocetsace 238 4 9 6 Z ACCESS RUGS O II deere ont mae ees 239 497 DHOPSNOODINO ri ios 241 4 9 7 1 DHCP Snooping OVSI Wisin aaron 241 AE AE WING aera a a donne ieee a aassacceeneamodeos 242 ALO NEAN SUING te e la Lo 243 4 9 7 4 POS ci eae 245 A A A A rere 246 A CAG CMM ceran a a b e E a Ea e a E aas 247 AOAR A Ne LIO a AA er ils ee ead A sia ns le Ae ee 249 49 78 OHOn e2 Glo Ball SC o acc 251 49 79 Opon S2 POSO oda 252 4 9 7 10 Option 82 Circuit ID Setting usina 254 4 9 8 Dynami ARFINN PECI enmsa ine anata TETA 255 ABA GOD SOWING enan Man os sane cs ae ened ee ince ee eet ec cacao 255 EA rece cre
20. ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the destination IP address filter you can enter a specific destination IP address The legal format is xxxx XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value When User Defined is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation Specify the source port for this ACE E Any No specifc source port is specified source port status is don t care NW Single If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE you can enter a specific source port value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value E Range If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE 28 you can enter a specific source port range value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value e Destination Port Specify the destination port for this ACE E Any No specifc destination port is specified destination port status is don t care NW Single If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE you can enter a specific destiantino port value A field for entering a destiantino port v
21. Click to apply changes Local Logging Setting Status CN A Figure 4 2 15 Local Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Display the current local log state e Target Display the current local log target e Severity Display the current local log severity e Action Delete Delete the current status 4 2 6 3 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages below a specified level Event Log Elina 192 168 0 100 Syslog Server IP 192 168 0 200 Port 514 The Remote Syslog screens in Figure 4 2 16 amp Figure 4 2 17 appear Remote Logging Setting su 01 69535 cal Apply Figure 4 2 16 Remote Log Target Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Provide the remote syslog IP address of this switch e Server Port Provide the port number of remote syslog server Default Port no 514 e Severity The severity of the local log entry The following severity types are supported E emerg Emergency level of the system unsable for local log E alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log 64 error Error
22. Last Member Query conut Last Member Query Interval sec Immediate Leave Modify Description Display the current entry number Display the current VLAN ID Display the current IGMP snooping operation status Display the current router ports auto learning Display the current query robustness Display the current query interval Display the current query max response interval Display the current last member query count Display the current last member query interval Display the current immediate leave Edit Click to edit parameter 167 4 7 2 2 IGMP Querier Setting This page provides IGMP Querier Setting The IGMP Querier Setting screens in Figure 4 7 10 Figure 4 7 11 appear IGMP Querier Setting Querier State Querier Version Apply Figure 4 7 10 IGMP VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Querier State Enable or disable the querier state The default value is Disabled Querier Version Sets the querier version for compatibility with other devices on the network Version 2 or 3 Default 2 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes IGMP Querier Status Figure 4 7 11 IGMP Querier Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Querier State Display the current querier state e Querier Status Display
23. MPro le 1 Y Critica lt 0 Profi 17 lt Y AAA 30 8 gt MENE g 13 lt Profile 1 Y Criti 00 Profile 1 Y Criti 30 mimm m m m m SSS SS Sis PITO IP WO Jm b EII Le Il lt L lt O OHIO a aa Ele Le il Profile 1 w 30 8 N y ooo Jeetresn 5 6 Check the LNK LED of the Long Reach Power over Ethernet interface on the front of the POC POC Managed Switch Ensure that the Long Reach Power over Ethernet interface is operating correctly 35 Remove the connected the Coaxial Cable 1 Make sure there is no network activity anymore 2 Disable Long Reach Power over Ethernet function for the all POC ports from WebuUI 1 POC2502 8CXP 2T 25 POC252 1CX 1P Figure 2 1 8 How to pull out the coaxial cable from POC Managed Switch PoE PT Camera Never pull out the coaxial cable without disabling Long Reach Power over Ethernet function for the port from WebUl Directly pulling out the coaxial cable could damage the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender and the BNC female connector of the POC Managed Switch If you are uninstalling a port we suggest that you turn that port off as voltage will be live at the output of the BNC connector and place BNC cap that shipped with unit back on to open BNC 1 The package contains eight warning stickers which should be stuck on the coaxial cable connector before using IFS POC2502 Managed Switch and POC extend
24. NW User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the DA MAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings mM 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the DA MAC address E 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the DA MAC address Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE E Any No SA MAC filter is specified NW User Defined If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a SA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the SA MAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings E 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SA MAC address W 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SA MAC address Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Include or exclude the 802 1p value Set the 802 1p value NW 0 where frame is not equal to the 802 1p value NW 1 where frame is equal to the 802 1p value You can enter a specific
25. The Egress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 18 amp Figure 4 8 19 appear Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Select Ports pisable O Enable sd 01000000 must a multiple of 16 Apply Figure 4 8 18 Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Egress Bandwidth Control Status Egress RateLimit Kbps Figure 4 8 19 Egress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot 204 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Egress Rate Limit Kbps Display the current egress rate limit 4 8 4 3 Egress Queue The Egress Queue Badwidth Control Settings and Status screens in Figure 4 8 20 amp Figure 4 8 21 appear Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings El v ODisable OEnabie 01000000 must a multiple of 16 Apply Figure 4 8 20 Egress Queue BandwidthSettings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Queue Select queue number from this drop
26. The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list e Method 1 3 Set the login authentication method Empty None Enable TACACS RADIUS Buttons Add Click to add authentication list Enable Authentication Lists CIS IN CN Figure 4 9 20 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 231 4 9 5 Access This section is to control the access of the POC Managed Switch including the different access methods Telnet SSH HTTP and HTTPS 4 9 5 1 Telnet The Telnet Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 21 amp Figure 4 9 22 appear Telnet Settings Disabled default default 0 65535 minutes a 0 120 0 65535 seconds Apply Disconnect Figure 4 9 21 Telnet Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Apply Disconnect Telnet Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Click to apply changes Description Disable or enable Telnet service Select login authentication list from this drop down list Select enable aut
27. When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore TX Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Transmit Delay seconds Transmit Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanisim Range 1 10 packets Default 3 packets The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port LLDP MED Fast Start is critical to the timely startup of LLDP and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service 298 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes LLDP Global Config Config Name Config Value LLOP Enabled Enabled LLOP POL Disable Action Flooding Flooding Transmission Interval Figure 4 12 2 LLDP Global Config Page Screenshot The page includes the follo
28. the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table gt If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the clients hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header gt If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped e f a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN e f a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN e f the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table E Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped 4 9 7 2 Global Setting
29. you can then configure the multicast groups to filter and set the access mode Command Usage e Each profile has only one access mode either permit or deny e When the access mode is set to permit multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range e When the access mode is set to deny multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range 186 4 7 7 1 Multicast Profile Setting The Add Profile and Profile Status screens in Figure 4 7 36 Figure 4 7 37 appear Add Profile 1 128 Add Figure 4 7 36 Add Profile Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Type Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop down list e Profile Index Indicates the ID of this particular profile e Group from Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering a start IP address e Group to Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering an end IP address e Action Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny Multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range Deny When the access mode is set to multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range Buttons Add Click to add multicast profile entry
30. 4 7 15 amp Figure 4 7 16 appear Add Router Port orbid P Add Figure 4 7 15 Add Router Port Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Type Sets the Router port type The types of Router port as below E Static NW Forbid e Static Ports Select Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier e Forbid Port Select Specify which ports un act as router ports Buttons Add Click to add IGMP router port entry Figure 4 7 16 Router Port Status Page Screenshot 171 The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID e Static Ports Display the current static ports e Forbidden Ports Display the current forbidden ports e Modify Click Edit to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 4 7 2 6 IGMP Router Table This page provides Router Table The Dynamic Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4 7 17 Figure 4 7 18 Figure 4 7 19 appear Dynamic Router Table O apy Tie Sea Figure 4 7 17 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Display the current dynamic router ports e Expiry Time Sec Disp
31. 65 A227 ONMIP Manage menta innatas 68 ARA ONMP OVER cir icotaco tad 68 42 12 SNMP Syst m IMnf rMatiON anne sito ita ninos 69 ARSS Id tl dd 70 42 A SNMP ACCESS OU is 72 42T ONG NAM tds a dd dos di 73 EA A A A A teases 75 4 25 SNMPW1 2 Notification RECIDICNIS a 76 4 2 7 9 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients cccccccsssssssssssseeeeeecceceesusseceeeeecesceeeaessseeeeeeeececsuaaaaaseeeeeeessesssaaaneees 77 AR VO ONE ENNE ID rason ed da eeeats 79 42 7 11 SNMP Remote Engine ID ass aiii tutti caida 80 ASP OM Mana doi a aE e E EA 82 A o o A N 82 43 2 FOG Pon COnnGuranOn ix waz nsscshetiascereen a e re eto coca 84 A A A 85 A D A BANAWE ZANO enaA e REA lll dato a iealvaintleconatceAadtvasiotharateceed 90 AAA e E a edged ce E a see ae 91 ASO MUNDO Panes usd ii dabas 93 437 POR Eror Disabled Configuration osc aiii 94 AO PON EMO DIS aC s N cnatad 96 A POLE CCA PONS cai dai 96 Ao O A eo ee ee nee ere rere eee 99 4 4 LINK AGONeG ato isis 101 A TEP A A ced eenece 103 AoA 2 LAG Manaos dai oras 104 AALS LAG o SEUNG E A re E A A Ra 105 TAAAC SENO SA eRe ee eT ee eee ea eae eee ne Tee CTT Came Reem Re T ee emir remem MET etre eee 107 4A LAS ARO SIN e o E ld dodo 108 A A et Pr Or Ro ce eer ee eee ee eee 109 A OLIN ais 112 Al ANOVA 112 452 TERE B02 10 VLAN otitis iii E 113 430 9 Mana de Men VLAN Ss A A A A A ad 116 ASA AS A O EE a Oras a ow Lacan ad aide dad cb nad ea eae asia de 117 4D Mente Soung sitcersan lees cttscuceesac
32. C S30 2SLC 70 1000Base ZX 2 Single mode LC 1550nm 1550nm 70km 0 5 24 24 0 50 C 35 2SLC 70 1000Base ZX 2 Single mode LC 1550nm 1550nm 70km 0 5 24 24 40 75 C S30 1SLC A 10 1000Base BX10 U 1 Single mode LC 1310nm 1490nm 10km 9 3 20 11 O 50 C S30 1SLC B 10 1000Base BX10 D 1 Single mode LC 1490nm 1310nm 10km 9 3 20 11 O 50 C S30 1SLC A 20 1000Base BX20 U 1 Single mode LC 1310nm 1490nm 20km ee 23 15 0 50 C S30 1SLC B 20 1000Base BX20 D 1 Single mode LC 1490nm 1310nm 20km r BR 23 15 0 50 C S30 1SLC A 60 1000Base BX60 U 1 Single mode LC 1310nm 1490nm 60km 0 5 24 24 0 50 C S30 1SLC B 60 1000Base BX60 D 1 Single mode LC 1490nm 1310nm 60km 0 5 24 24 0 50 C 220m distance is based on 62 5 125 OM1 fiber 550m distance is based on 50 125 OM2 fiber Requires laser optimized 50 125 OM3 fiber to achieve 2km distance Fiber should be tested and verified to OM3 standard Legend SFP Type Heading standard SFP Hardened SFP wide temp the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar that is not supported the POC Managed Switch will not recognize it It is recommended to use IFS SFP on the POC Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver In the installation steps below this Manual uses Gigabit SFP transceiver as an example However 1 Before we connect POC Managed Switch to the other network device we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same me
33. DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of switch when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 33 Figure 4 9 34 appear DHCP Snooping Setting DHCP Snooping O Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 9 33 DHCP Snooping Setting Page Screenshot 242 The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP Snooping Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping Informations Information Name Information Value DHCP Snooping disabled Figure 4 9 34 DHCP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP Snooping Display the current DHCP snooping status 4 9 7 3 VLAN Setting Command Usage e When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch and enabled on the specified VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN e When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can st
34. E PD Reboot amp Alarm lt means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP E Alarm lt means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP e Reboot Time 30 180s This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time as there are so many kinds of PoE devices on the market and they have a different rebooting time The PD Alive check is not a defining standard so the PoE device on the market doesn t report reboot done information to the PoE Switch Thus user has to make sure how long the PD will take to finish booting and then set the time value to this column System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time If you are not sure of the precise booting time we suggest you set it longer Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 338 4 16 Maintenance Use the Maintenance menu items to display and configure basic configurations of the POC Managed Switch Under maintenance the following topics are provided to back up upgrade save and restore the configuration This section has the following items MM Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Mi Reboot Switch You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally Mi Backup Manager You can back up the switch configuration Mi Upgrade Manager You can upgrade the switch configuration HM Dual Image Select active or backup image on this Page 4 16
35. Flow Control Status 4 3 2 POC Port Configuration Description This is the logical port number for this row Click Edit to indicate the port name Display the current port state Display the current link status Display the current speed status of the port Display the current duplex status of the port Display the current flow control configuration of the port Display the current flow control status of the port This page displays current POC port configurations and status Ports can also be configured here The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 1B Figure 4 3 2B appear Port settings Port Select Enabled Select Ports Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 3 1B POC Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Enabled Indicates the port state operation Possible state are Enabled Start up the port manually Disabled Shut down the port manually 84 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Port Status ae Enable Link COS A TI MN CONO IS TI C CIN IN NN COMES CIO O CTO Figure 4 3 2B Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Click Edit to indicate the p
36. ID 0 30 4tat ft01 Byte Format Figure 4 9 45 Option 82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Option 82 Remote ID Display the current option 82 remote ID 4 9 7 9 Option 82 Port Setting This function is used to set the retransmitting policy of the system for the received DHCP request message which contains option 82 The drop mode means that if the message has option 82 then the system will drop it without processing keep mode means that the system will keep the original option 82 segment in the message and forward it to the server to process replace mode means that the system will replace the option 82 segment in the existing message with its own option 82 and forward the message to the server to process Option 82 Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 46 Figure 4 9 47 appear Option82 Port Setting Srt Enable Allow UnTrusted Select Ports 7 OEnable ODisable Apply Figure 4 9 46 Option 82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 252 Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Enable Enable or disable option 82 function on port e Allow Untrusted Select modes from this drop down list The following modes are available E Drop E Keep E Replace Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Option Port Setting GEA disabled Dran LALI A Orap Figure 4 9 47 Option 82 Global Setting Page
37. ID of the entry e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e Port The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Add to Static MAC table Glick to add dynamic MAC address to static MAC address 296 4 12 LLDP 4 12 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 12 2 LLDP Global Setting This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Global Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 12
38. IP Precedence Disable or enable remark IP Precedence Buttons Appl PPIY Click to apply changes QoS Port Status Remark Cos Remark DSCP Remark IP Precedence disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled LAL ase Toew a ee ee LAG Cl Aisa die alles dpe lies LAGE 4 EE E dealer Figure 4 8 3 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot 193 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e CoS Value e Remark CoS e Remark DSCP e Remark IP Precedence 4 8 2 3 Queue Settings Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current CoS value Display the current remark CoS Display the current remark DSCP Display the current remark IP precedence The Queue Table and Information screens in Figure 4 8 4 amp Figure 4 8 5 appear Queue The page includes the following fields Object e Queue e Strict Priority e WRR Queue Table scheduling Method Strict Priority WRR Weight of WRR Bandwidth Figure 4 8 4 Queue Table Page Screenshot Description Display the current queue ID Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority on this switch port Controls whether the scheduler mode is Weighted on this switch port 194 e Weight Controls the weight for this queue This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e of WRR Bandwidth Displa
39. Information Value SNTP Server Port 123 Figure 4 2 11 SNTP Server Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNTP Server Address Display the current SNTP server address e Server Port Display the current SNTP server port 60 4 2 6 Log Management The POC Managed Switch log management is provided here The local logs allow you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels O to 6 to be logged to RAM The following table lists the event levels of the POC Managed Switch Level Severity Name Description Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only Normal but significant condition such as cold start Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted ES Immediate action needed Emergency System unusable 4 2 6 1 Local Log The switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 12 amp Figure 4 2 13 appear Logging Settings Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 2 12 Logging Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Enabled Enable logging service operation Disabled Disable
40. Modify Click E to modify VLAN membership 124 4 5 8 Protocol VLAN Group Setting The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this POC Managed Switch with protocol based VLANSs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page This page allows you to configure protocol based VLAN Group Setting The portocol based VLAN screens in Figure 4 5 9 Figure 4 5 10 appear Add Proto
41. OFF ON 0000 Allows scheduled power recycling 334 The screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears PoE Schedule PoE Schedule Configuration nd End Reboot Reboot Reboot Reboot Min Enable Only Hour Mi Add New Rule Apply M PoE Schedule sta PoE Reboot Fri Thu Wed Tue Mon aun 00h 01h 02h03h 0440506 0h Osh 09h 10N14h 12N13h 14h 15h 16h 17h18h 19h 40h 24h 22h 23h 00h Figure 4 16 4 PoE Schedule Screenshot Please press Add New Rule button to start setting PoE Schedule function You have to set PoE schedule to profile and then go back to PoE Port Configuration and select Schedule mode from per port PoE Mode option to enable you to indicate which schedule profile could be applied to the PoE port The page includes the following fields Object Description e Profile Set the schedule profile mode Possible profiles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 e Week Day Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function by enabling it on the day e Start Hour Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by enabling it e Start Min Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by enabling it 335 e End Hour e End Min e Reboot Enable e Reboot Only e Reboot Hour e Reboot Min Buttons Add New Rule APPIY Click to apply changes Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by disabling it Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by disabling it A
42. POC Managed Switch 2 Try another port on the POC Managed Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again MM 100BASE TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Mi Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord is not inserted or faulty 2 Check whether the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly Check whether the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 346 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power 347 APPENDIX A A 1 Switch s RJ45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T mb On OGO A WwW DN BI_DA BI_DA BI_DB BI_DC BI_DC BI_DB BI_DD BI_DD BI_DB BI_DB BI_DA BI_DD BI_DD BI_DA BI_DC BI_DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100BASE TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is ne
43. PRA ce ne cee Se De TEC teed ORE ere eS Tee Patt 256 LS SRO A e seat deneepaaetcotete 257 AI Fe UALS o a nds sence tidal atacand 259 AO AVS LIN da ass 260 4g 9 IP AA AA cere eee eaee ates 261 E lila eet OE O OE ae cee eee O A eee Tener 262 499 Y o A 263 AO POL SGC ore 265 A fe B A eee cen DN fe etree ere Se ot Re ee rene Aer oe Re ee eon eee eee tee Renee ere eee een eee eee 267 43111 GloDal DOS Seti iia iibalaies 267 49 12 DOS POM SUI seen tia eset a Nala et te aa es ee es cle ieee ie 270 dla SOMO CORTO st a O 272 4312 AG lOD ASC MAG caros io reirnos 272 EN o A 273 o A O A E A 275 AB O A A AO E 275 A OZ MAG DASEC ACE ainen E E E E UeubouskeashGn E E 276 Bh TO Pe A a A AN 279 AAO O a aa a a E dnsdecanaotencatnes 279 A WOON o O A O E A AN 284 4 106 PYS Das CO AE AS 285 AS AEREO e En oe 290 ANT MAC Address Ml da ed 291 All Stato MAG SENING resone eeneange Guenee ates Taceducnoeaeen stedndietio e 292 AIMAR eee ee ee iD 293 4 11 3 Dynamic Address Sein scc ccscs eters sted ts adele aaasieie ii ias 294 a TA Dynami Learned mensas a a tab atlnansuda E 295 A A te hele a a a a 297 Ae Layer DISCovery PrOlOCO dsssronatra na idee atmasccundanacoaaeceecandinsausem 297 daa DP Glo Dal Sen cisnes tela alienta rasta toas nieta 297 41230 LEDO SGU a in e e e lod o e la do 300 4 124 LEDP EN A E a E E een naueenadaawines 303 ATZO O O ieee ea A a a a a he a utente cate 304 4126 MED NetWork ROI 306 412 MEDIDOS e o ld ete a 309 4 12 38 LED P
44. Refresh Jan 01 2000 08 00 19 Port git link up Figure 4 2 20 Logging Messages Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for logs e Timestamp Display the time of log e Category Display the category type e Severity Display the severity type e Message Display the log message Buttons Clear Click to clear the log Refresh Click to refresh the log 67 4 2 7 SNMP Management 4 2 7 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of four components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agent management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network eleme
45. Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Enable Display the current status e Allow Untrusted Display the current untrusted mode 203 4 9 7 10 Option 82 Circuit ID Setting Set creation method for option 82 users can define the parameters of circute id suboption by themselves Option 82 Circuit 1D Setting screens in Figure 4 9 48 amp Figure 4 9 49 appear Option82 Port Circuit ID Setting VI Vian Circuit ID Apply Figure 4 9 48 Option 82 Port Circuit ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e VLAN Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Circuit ID Set the option1 Circuit ID content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Options Port Setting Figure 4 9 49 Option 82 Port Circuit ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e VLAN Display the current VLAN e Circuit ID Display the current circuit ID 254 4 9 8 Dynamic ARP Inspection Dynamic ARP Inspection DAI is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT
46. TX Click to clear the MLD Snooping Statistics Refresh Click to refresh the MLD Snooping Statistics 184 4 7 6 Multicast Throttling Setting Multicast throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new multicast join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group Once you have configured multicast profiles you can assign them to interfaces on the POC Managed Switch Also you can set the multicast throttling number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time The MAX Group and Information screens in Figure 4 7 34 amp Figure 4 7 35 appear The page includes the following fields Max Groups and Action Setting IP Type Port Select Max Groups Action Apply Figure 4 7 34 Max Groups and Action Setting Page Screenshot Object Buttons Apply IP Type Port Select Max Groups Action Click to apply changes Description Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop down list Select port number from this drop down list Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time Range 0 256 Default 256 Sets the action to take when the m
47. The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS servers in the network The security servers can be defined as sequential groups that are then applied as a method for controlling user access to specified services For example when the switch attempts to authenticate a user a request is sent to the first server in the defined group if there is no response the second server will be tried and so on If at any point a pass or fail is returned the process stops The POC Managed Switch supports the following AAA features e Accounting for IEEE 802 1X authenticated users that access the network through the POC Managed Switch e Accounting for users that access management interfaces on the POC Managed Switch through the console and Telnet e Accounting for commands that users enter at specific CLI privilege levels Authorization of users that access management interfaces on the POC Managed Switch through the console and Telnet To configure AAA on the POC Managed Switch you need to follow this general process 1 Configure RADIUS and TACACS server access parameters See Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 2 Define RADIUS and TACACS server groups to support the accounting and authorization of services 3 Define a method name for each service to which you want to apply accounting or authorization and specify the RADIUS or TACACS server groups to use Apply the method names to port or line interfaces This gui
48. This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration A Dynamic ARP prevents the untrusted ARP packets based on the DHCP Snooping Database 4 9 8 1 Global Setting DAI Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 50 Figure 4 9 51 appear DAI Setting OEnabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 9 50 DAI Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DAI Enable the Global Dynamic ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DAI Informations Figure 4 9 51 DAI Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DAI Display the current DAI status 255 4 9 8 2 VLAN Setting DAI VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4 9 52 Figure 4 9 53 appear DAI VLAN Setting Apply Figure 4 9 52 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Status Enables Dynamic ARP Inspection on the specified VLAN Options E Enable m Disable Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DAI VLAN Setting Figure 4 9 53 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e Status Display the current status 206 4 9 8 3 Port Setting Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode DAI Port Setting s
49. VLAN configuration mismatches on a port Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption Location This option advertises location identification details Inventory This option advertises device details useful for inventory management such as manufacturer model software version and other pertinent information e MED Network Policy Select MED network policy from this drop down list Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes LLDP MED Port Setting Table User Defined Network Policy Interface LLDP MED Status Yes GE1 SES GE5 GE GES GE10 Figure 4 12 13 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e LLDP MED Status Display the current LLDP MED status e Active Display the current active status e Application Display the current application 310 e Location Display the current location e Inventory Display the current inventory The MED Location Configuration and LLDP MED Port Location Table screens in Figure 4 12 14 amp Figure 4 12 15 appear MED Location Configuration Select Ports 16 pairs of hexadecimal characters 6 160 pairs of hexadecimal characters Apply Figure 4 12 14 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Por
50. VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced Edit Interface Setting The Edit Interface Setting Status screens in Figure 4 5 5 amp Figure 4 5 6 appear Edit Interface Setting ne Interface VLAN Mode Accepted Type Ingress Filtering a TPID Select Ports Hybrid Oaccess OTrunk O E O Tag Only O untag Enabled O Enabled Tunnel 2550 Only Disabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 5 5 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list to set VLAN port setting e Interface VLAN Mode Set the port in access trunk hybrid and tunnel mode NW Trunk means the
51. are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry lt describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application The ACL page contains links to the following main topics El MAC based ACL Configure MAC based ACL setting a MAC based ACE Add Edit Delete the MAC based ACE Access Control Entry setting a IPv4 based ACL Configure IPv4 based ACL setting A IPv4 based ACE Add Edit Delete the IPv4 based ACE Access Control Entry setting E IPv6 based ACL Configure IPv6 based ACL setting Es IPv6 based ACE Add Edit Delete the IPv6 based ACE Access Control Entry setting E ACL Binding Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port 4 10 1 MAC based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations MAC based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 1 amp Figure 4 10 2 appear MAC Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 1 MAC based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes t
52. as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link This section has the following items E STP Global Setting Configures STP system settings a STP Port Setting Configures per port STP setting E CIST Instance Setting Configures system configuration a CIST Port Setting Configures CIST port setting E MST Instance Setting Configures each MST instance setting E MST Port Setting Configures per port MST setting E STP Statistics Displays the STP statistics 4 6 2 STP Global Settings This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch The POC Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree Protocols Compatible Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning
53. authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or
54. automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Ping test Setting IPv6 AGN ge Address AAA Count 1 3 Default 4 Interval lin sec 1 5 Default 1 Size in 8 5120 Default 56 bytes Ping Results Apply Figure 4 13 4 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IPv6 Address e Count Number of echo requests to send e Interval in sec Send interval for each ICMP packet e Size in bytes The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes e Ping Results Display the current ping result 318 4 13 5 Trace Router Traceroute function is for testing the gateways through which the data packets travel from the source device to the destination device so to check the network accessibility and locate the network failure Execution procedure of the Traceroute function consists of first a data packet with TTL at 1 is sent to the destination address if the first hop returns an ICMP error message to inform this packet can not be sent due to TTL timeout a data packet with TTL at 2 will be sent Also the send hop may be a TTL timeout return but the procedure will carries on till the data packet is sent to its destination These procedures is for recording every source address which returned ICMP TTL timeout message so to desc
55. changes Engine ID Status Information Name Information Value Ilse Default Enabled Engine ID 20006 a92030000304111 22 Figure 4 2 36 SNMPv3 Engine ID Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Default Display the current status 19 e Engine ID Display the current engine ID 4 2 7 11 SNMP Remote Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 remote Engine ID on this page The SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 37 8 Figure 4 2 38 appear Remote EnginelD Setting Add Figure 4 2 37 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote IP Address Indicates the SNMP remote engine ID address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Remote Engine ID Status Remote IP Address Remote Engine ID Action Figure 4 2 38 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote IP Address Display the current remote IP address e Engine ID Display the current engine ID e Action Delete Delete the remote IP address entry 81 4 3 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the POC Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items E Port Configu
56. changes 4 7 3 IGMP Snooping Statics This page provides IGMP Snooping Statics The IGMP Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4 7 20 appears IGMP Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Valid EX Invalid RA Other Ra Leave RA Report Rx General Query RA specall Group Source Query Ra Leave TA Report TX General Query TA specall Group Query Ta specall Group Source Query TX Figure 4 7 20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 174 Object Buttons Clear Total RX Valid RX Invalid RX Other RX Leave RX Report RX General Query RX Special Group Query RX Special Group amp Source Query RX Leave TX Report TX General Query TX Special Group Query TX Special Group amp Source Query TX Description Display current total RX Display current valid RX Display current invalid RX Display current other RX Display current leave RX Display current report RX Display current general query RX Display current special group query RX Display current special group source query RX Display current leave TX Display current report TX Display current general query TX Display current special group query TX Display current special group source query TX Click to clear the IGMP Snooping Statistics Retresh Click to refresh the IGMP Snooping Statistics 175 4 7 4 MLD Snooping 4 7 4 1 MLD Setting This page provides MLD Snooping
57. computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Mon Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Recelved Delaying Member ctr heehee Idle Member Stop Timer Timer Expned Send report Figure 4 7 6 IGMP State Transitions E IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service en Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 165 4 7 2 1 IGMP Setting This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 7 7 Figure 4 7 8 amp Figure 4 7 9 appear ISMP Snooping Apply Figure 4 7 7 IGMP Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IGMP Snooping Status Enable or disable the IG
58. down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e CIR Kbps Configure the CIR for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 205 GET Egress Per Queue Status Figure 4 8 21 Egress Queue Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Queue ID Display the current queue ID e Rate Limit Kbps Display the current rate limit 206 4 8 5 Voice VLAN 4 5 8 1 Introduction to Voice VLAN Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page Voice VLAN is specially configured for the user voice data traffic By setting a Voice VLAN and adding the ports of the connected voice equipments to Voice VLAN the user will be able to configure QoS Quality of service service for voice data and improve voice data traffic transmission priority to ensure the calling quality The switch can judge if the data traffic is the voice data traffic from specified equipment according to the source MAC address field of the data packet entering the port The packet with the source MAC address complying with the system defined voice equipment OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier will be considered the voice data traffic and transmitted to the Voice VLAN The configuration is based on MAC address acquiring a mechanism in which every voice equipment transmitting info
59. field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes Destination Source Ethernet Preamble VLAN TAG FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes 114 The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr ro ddr Length E type ENS Old CRC Original Ethernet M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from
60. follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality mM When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN E When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e Port based 802 1X 221 Guest VLAN Status GE Disabled No GEX Disabled No Giles Disabled NO Figure 4 9 8 Guest VLAN Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields m DO a o Aft Y Qi gt i a FiA Q JE J a IUOTI ISU Bh uw JU OII e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Enable State Display the current state e In Guest VLAN Display the current guest VLAN 222 4 9 1 5 Authenticated Host The Authenticated Host Table screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears Authenticated Host Table Figure 4 9 9 Authenticated Host Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name Display the current user name e Port Display the current port number e Session Time Display the current session time e Authenticat
61. in the binding entries of the IP source guard If there is a matching entry the port will forward the packet Otherwise the port will abandon the packet IP source guard filters packets based on the following types of binding entries E IP port binding entry al MAC port binding entry E IP MAC port binding entry IP Source Guard Overview DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard DHCP Trust Port DHCP Client A Invader 197 168 0 1 192 168 0 2 261 4 9 9 1 Port Settings IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host The IP Source Guard Port Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 60 amp Figure 4 9 61 appear NIN source Guard Port Setting Status oo Verify Source Verify Source Max Binding Entry Apply Figure 4 9 60 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Status Enable or disable the IP source guard e Verify Source Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based IP address or IP address and MAC address None Disables IP source guard filtering on the POC Managed Switch m IP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in th
62. interface in 1000BASE T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m if the link is established in 1OOBASE TX or 10BASE T the Cable Diagnostics causes the link to drop while the diagnostics is running After the diagnostics is finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available Coupling between cable pairs m Cable pair termination Cable length Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length from 15 to 100 meters 315 The Copper test and test result screens in Figure 4 13 1 amp Figure 4 13 2 appear selectthe port on which to run the copper test Port Copper Test Figure 4 13 1 Copper Test Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list Buttons Copper Test Click to run the diagnostics Port Channel A CableLengthA ChammelB Cable LengthB ChammelC Cable Length Channel D Cable Length D Figure 4 13 2 Test Results Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Channel A D Display the current channel status e Cable Length A D Display the current cable length e Result Display the test result 4 13 2 Ping The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP ping packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The POC Managed Switch transmits ICMP pac
63. list Echo Fenk Protocol ID to match Range 0 255 O Any O User Defined Range 0 255 Add Figure 4 10 7 IP based ACE Page Screenshot 280 The page includes the following fields Object e ACL Name e Sepuence e Action e Protocol e Source IP Address e Source IP Address Value e Source IP Wildcard Mask e Destination IP Address e Destination IP Address Value e Destination IP Wildcard Mask e Source Port Description Select ACL name from this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned E Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped E Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Specify the protocol filter for this ACE E Any IP No protocol filter is specified NW Select from list If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and select protocol for this drop down list W Protocol ID to match If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and set currect protocol ID Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE mM Any No source IP address filter is specified m User Defined If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the source IP address filter you can enter a
64. loader date of this POC Managed Switch The firmware version of this POC Managed Switch The firmware date of this POC Managed Switch The system object ID of the POC Managed Switch The period of time the device has been operational The hardware version of this POC Managed Switch The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill out the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screens in Figure 4 2 2 amp Figure 4 2 3 appear IP Address Setting 142 168 1 1 255 205 295 0 132 168 1254 168 5 1 1 168 495 1941 Apply The page includes the following fields Figure 4 2 2 IP Address Setting Page Screenshot Object Description 92 e Mode Buttons Apply IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Server 1 2 Indicates the IP address mode operation Possible modes are Static Enable NTP mode operation When enabling NTP mode operation the agent forwards and transfers NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain DHCP Enable DHCP client mode operation Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to pr
65. more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 9 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 215 Authentication Client l Sonic pee 802 1X Switch y A Y E EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request oe TF FF EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challen
66. multicast address The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 89 4 3 4 Bandwidth Utilization The Bandwidth Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the ports Bandwith utilization statistics can be viewed using a line graph The Bandwidth Utilization screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears To view the port utilization click on
67. needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near the switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers only need to know the community name Table 3 1 Comparison of Management Methods 39 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the POC Managed Switch s console port PC Workstation with Terminal Emulation Software Managed Switch RS232 to RJ45 Cable A et Serial Port Figure 3 1 1 Console Management Direct Access Direct access to the admini
68. network administrator such as optical output power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage 15 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the POC Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the POC Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the POC Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the POC Managed Switch Section 6 TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to troubleshoot of the POC Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the POC Managed Switch 1 4 Product Features E Physical Port HM 100Mbps BNC female ports with Long Reach PoE Injector function HM 2 10 100 1000BASE T Gigabit RJ45 copper ports Mi 2 100 1000BASE X mini GBIC SFP slots Mi RJ45 console interface for switch basic management and setup Long Reach Power over Ethernet Mi Supports PoE power up to 36 watts for each PoE port Mi Remote power feeding up to 1 kilometer with low impedance 750 coaxial cable Mi Long Reach PoE Management Total Long Reach PoE power budget control Per port Long Reach PoE function enable disable Long Reach PoE port power feeding
69. of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 153 CIST Port Status Indentifier External Priority Path Cost Path Cost Port 1D Conf Oper Conf Oper Oo ai a o nS 00 00 00 00 00 00 Oo aes igi ct 00 00 00 00 00 00 i 3 s x a GFA i Designated Root Bridge Regional Root Designated Port Bridge Bridge Conf Oper Conf Oper Os Of 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20000 Disabled 0 07 20000 no No Auo No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A EAEE E Os j f oy 20000 No No Auto No Disabed Disabled 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ad O e E A No No Auto No Disabed Disabled 128 3 0 20000 0 20000 o A 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0n n0 0 Of LAGE 128 16 O 20000 0 20000 00 00 00 00 00 00 D LAG 128 1 17 O 20000 0 20000 00 00 00 00 00 00 O LAG6 126 16 O 20000 0 20000 00 00 00 00 00 00 198 A n 20000 0 20000 O 00 00 00 00 00 00 o Oo 00 00 00 00 00 00 Df 00 00 00 00 00 00 Auto No Disabed Disabled O 00 00 00 00 00 00 ae j 0 0 0 Figure 4 6 11 CIST Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Indentif
70. port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 144 A LAN 1 gt Port cost 200 000 A 7 Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B c Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 _ gt A LAN 3 gt Figure 4 6 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A 7 Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port C Designated Bridge A LAN 2 __ A LAN 3 _ gt Figure 4 6 3 After Applying the STA Rules 145 The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen
71. priority Per Long Reach PoE port power limitation Long Reach PD alive check Long Reach PoE schedule 16 Layer 2 Features MM Prevents packet loss with back pressure half duplex and IEEE 802 3x pause frame flow control full duplex MM High performance Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control runt CRC filtering that eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth Mi Supports VLAN IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Protocol VLAN Voice VLAN Private VLAN Management VLAN GVRP Mi Supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol STP BPDU Guard BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding HM Supports Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel static trunk Maximum 4 trunk groups up to 4 ports per trunk group Mi Provides port mirror many to 1 Mi Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops Quality of Service Mi Ingress Egress rate limit per port bandwidth control Mi Storm control support Broadcast Unknown unicast Unknown multicast M Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS ToS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets W Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Multicast Mi Supports IGMP snooping v2 and v3 Supports MLD snooping v1 v2 IGMP queri
72. statistics alarms and events HM IFS Smart Discovery utility HM Smart fan with speed control 18 1 5 Product Specifications Model Hardware Specifications Ethernet Interfaces Long Reach PoE Interfaces Copper Fiber Optic Jumbo Frame Connectivity Power Output Total POE Budget Cabling Maximum Distance Long Reach Ethernet Standard Modulation Type Security Frequency Band POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S 2 x 10 100 1000BASE T RJ45 Auto negotiation Auto MDI MDI X 2 x 100 1000BASE X SFP slot Supports 100 1000Mbps dual mode and DDM 10Kbytes with GE1 to GE4 POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S 8 x BNC female connectors POC2502 16CXP 2T 25 16 x BNC female connectors Long Reach PoE over coaxial PSE Power Source Equipment Em BNC center pole DC Hi EH BNC shield DC Lo Per port 54V DC 36 watts max Per port 52V DC 36 watts max 240 watts max 380 watts max Coaxial cable 75 ohm Low Impedance RG 6 U cable Recommended Max 200m with PoE output 1 64 0ft Max 400m with PoE output 2 624ft Max 1000m with PoE output 3 280ft Max 1200m with data output only 3 937ft IEEE 1901 Wavelet OFDM 128 bit AES encryption 2 28MHz 19 POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S Cable Data Rate POC252 1CX 1P TX RX PoE Output T RG6 91 8Mbps 81 1Mbps 200m Distance ype RG6 POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S Cable Data Rate POC252 1CX 1P y TX RX PoE Output Type Perf
73. the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility By supporting the standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the switch can be managed via any standard management software For text based management the switch can be accessed via Telnet and the console port Moreover the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch offers secure remote management by supporting SSH SSL and SNMP v3 connections which encrypt the packet content at each session Flexibility and Long distance Extension Solution The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch provides two Gigabit TP interfaces supporting 10 100 1000BASE T RJ45 copper to be connected with surveillance network devices such as NVR Video Streaming Server or NAS to facilitate surveillance management Or through another two dual speed fiber SFP slots it can connect with the 100BASE FX 1000BASE SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber transceiver to uplink to backbone switch and monitoring center in long distance The distance can be extended from 550 meters to 2 kilometers multi mode fiber and up to 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber or WDM fiber The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch is well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions Intelligent SFP Diagnosis Mechanism The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch also supports SFP DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitor function that can easily monitor real time parameters of the SFP for
74. then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 8 26 amp Figure 4 8 27 appear Voice VLAN Port Setting Port State Co State Cos Mode select Ports OEnabled Disabled Qal Sre Apply Figure 4 8 26 Voice VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number for this drop down list e State Enable or disable the voice VLAN port setting The default value is Disabled e CoS Mode Select the current CoS mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Voice VLAN Port State Disahlecd LAGE Disabled LAG Disabled LAGO Disabled Figure 4 8 27 Voice VLAN Port State Page Screenshot 211 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e State e CoS Mode Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current state Display the current CoS mode 212 4 9 Security This section is to control the access of the POC Managed Switch including the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics E 802 1X E DHCP Snooping E Radius Server Al Dynamic ARP Inspec
75. to delete RMON event entry 4 14 3 RMON Event Log This page provides an overview of RMON Event Log The RMON Event Log Table screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears RMON Event Log Table Event Index Select Event v Figure 4 14 4 RMON Event Log Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list e Index Indicates the index of the log entry e Log Time Indicates Event log time e Description Indicates the Event description 323 4 14 4 RMON Alarm Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The RMON Alarm screens in Figure 4 14 5 amp Figure 4 14 6 appear RMON Alarm Create Hew 1 655559 1 214 7403064 Oabsolute Odelta O 214 4064 O 214 40064 Hone Unassigned e gt None Unassigned e 0 31 Charactors Apply Figure 4 14 5 RMON Alarm Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index e Index Indicates the index of the alarm entry e Sample Port Select port from this drop down list e Sample Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are E DropEvents The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources NW Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framin
76. traffic for each subnet into separate domains This POC Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This POC Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features E Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard a Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs A End stations can belong to multiple VLANs E Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware dev
77. up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange wakeup time information using the LLDP protocol EEE works for ports in auto negotiation mode where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100 Mbit full duplex mode For ports that are not EEE capable the corresponding EEE checkboxes are grayed out and thus impossible to enable EEE for The EEE port settings relate to the currently unit as reflected by the page header When a port is powered down for saving power outgoing traffic is stored in a buffer until the port is powered up again Because there are some overhead in turning the port down and up more power can be saved if the traffic can be buffered up until a large burst of traffic can be transmitted Buffering traffic will give some latency in the traffic The EEE Port Sttings screens in Figure 4 3 18 8 Figure 4 3 19 appear EEE Port Settings Apply Figure 4 3 18 EEE Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Enable Enable or disable the EEE function Buttons 99 Apply _ pr PPY Click to apply changes EEE Enable Status Figure 4 3 19 EEE Enable Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Port The switch port number of the logical port e EEE State Display the current EEE state 100 4 4 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports t
78. w y EL Public Servers Promiscuous Access Denied Access Denied Access Denied Private VLAN For protected port group to be applied the POC Managed Switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation Ports in a protected port group fall into one of these two groups a Promiscuous Unprotected ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E isolated Protected ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently unit as reflected by the page header The Port Isolation Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 16 amp Figure 4 3 17 appear 97 Protected Ports Settings Pio la wr o ck O D art let Di PE Ty pa g bar A EF m a L ie 2 L I ol L I 4 FE Y Select Protected Pore Unprotec
79. 1 amp Figure 4 12 2 appear Global Settings Figure 4 12 1 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Globally enable or disable LLDP function e LLDP PDU Disable Set LLDP PDU disable action include Filtering Bridging and Flooding Action E Filtering discard all LLDP PDUs 297 e Transmission Interval e Holdtime Multiplier e Reinitialization Delay e Transmit Delay e LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count E Bridging transmit LLDP PDU in the same VLAN E Flooding transmit LLDP PDU for all port The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Holdtime multiplied by Transmission Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds
80. 1 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears and click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Restore Figure 4 15 1 Factory Default Page Screenshot After the Factory button is pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as follows Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the POC Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button on the front panel for about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the Es A management Web interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 4 16 2 Reboot Switch The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user has to 339 re login the Web interface for about 60 seconds The Reboot Switch screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears and click to reboot the system Reboot Figure 4 16 2 Reboot Switch Page Screenshot 4 16 3 Backup Manager This function allows backup of the current image or configuration of the POC Managed Switch to the local management station Backup Manager B cKUL Methog T
81. 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below Authentication server RADIUS Server Authentication server Authenticator Internet PLANET 802 14 aware Switch Intrane Supplicant Client with 802 1 authentication Figure 4 9 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification 214 Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the
82. 4 7 13 IGMP Static Groups Page Screenshot 169 The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID e Group IP Address Display the current group IP address e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Modify Click Edit to edit parameter 4 7 2 4 IGMP Group Table This page provides Multicast Database The IGMP Group Table screen in Figure 4 7 14 appears IGMP Group Table VLAN ID Group IP Address Life Sec Figure 4 7 14 IGMP Group Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VID e Group IP Address Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Port Display the current member port e Type Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic depending on selected options e Life Sec Display the current life 170 4 7 2 5 IGMP Router Setting Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your POC Managed Switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the POC Managed Switch The IGMP Router Setting and Status screens in Figure
83. 71 ATRIO ASMA OU Tala AA AAA AAA 172 Ae IGMP Forward All a A a iaa 173 4 7 3 GMP SNOO PNO AS e aer ad e 174 ARA NED SMOG DING tatiana 176 A BAS AAA o EE PO T AS 176 AT Are MLD Stale GrOUD a 178 va 8 ers 1 B 018 oa k meee ee enema oo omen tee ce Peter oe aoe eek ee eee ee re eee erie ee ere eee eee meet 179 4T AANMELD Router Setn eseni ea a a T R O E 179 ASA MILD ROUE TaD it E ancluea eats Pena uicenincd enti neeamee 181 4 LAG MILD Forward All 182 AO MED SOO DING SICS opni a a i 183 4 7 6 M lticast Throttling SC sin cias 185 AMC RIE arei a a a a E E a a S 186 ATT A MUI CES EP FORME Seting a E axe eee eoecnnee 187 AZ GMI FANT Se TIN i tes td dd o a sel a eases 188 A A e do de ee coe 189 4 8 Quality Of SOl VIC Cis iaa ito 191 AOA Under tand OS it A a 191 A Genera A Suecia 192 48 2A QOS PrOPemnies ii ni cl ti ci ri 192 49 22 90 9 OM SOWING SA ii 193 48 23 QUEUE INS lia doi 194 9 2 COS Mapp ia A A A E A ieee au ee 195 ASA ae eee ee on eee 197 4 8 2 6 IP Precedence Map Nr it 199 48 3 005 Basie Mode rta A A uence ve aneecete 200 4 9 3 1 Glopa Settings ii to 200 48 32 POMO CIO a id edo inside 201 AOA GS rt N 202 4 8 4 1IMoress Banawidti Control iii 202 4 842 Egress Bandwidth CONTO y A O A A A a a elem ee 204 48A EgreSsSs US e y dia 205 AO 5 VOICE VLAN aan tesescerts otitis cid iaa 207 AD Bl INToducionto VOICE VEAN sica a 207 A d i at ad eee aaa ec aaa 207 4 3 5 3 lelepnony OUI MAC Sc Hd miii tibio i n 209
84. 7483647 Falling threshold value 0 2147483647 Event to fire when the rising threshold is crossed Event to fire when the falling threshold is crossed Specify an owner for the alarm Index Sample Port Sample Variable Sample Interval Sample Type Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Falling Event Owner Action The page includes the following fields Object Index Sample Port Sample Variable Sample Interval Sample Type Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Falling Event Owner Action Figure 4 14 6 RMON Alarm Status Page Screenshot Description Indicates the index of Alarm control entry Display the current sample port Display the current sample variable Display the current interval Display the current sample type Display the current rising threshold Display the current falling threshold Display the current rising event Display the current falling event Display the current owner Click Delete to delete RMON alarm entry 326 4 14 5 RMON History Configure RMON History table on this page The RMON History screens in Figure 4 14 7 amp Figure 4 14 8 appear RMON History 1 50 Default 50 1 3600 Default 1500 0 31 Charactors Figure 4 14 7 RMON History Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index e Index Indicates the index
85. 9 69 appear STF Port Setting Port Select Dos Protection Enabled Disabled Select Ports Apply Figure 4 9 68 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 2 0 e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e DoS Protection Enable or disable per port DoS protection Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DoS Port Status Figure 4 9 68 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e DoS Protection Display the current DoS protection 2 1 4 9 12 Storm Control Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There is an unknown unicast storm rate control unknown multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table 4 9 12 1 Global Setting The Storm Control Global Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 69 Figure 4 9 70 appear storm Control Global Setting Unit Opps Obps Preamble amp IFG 6 Excluded Olncluded Apply Figure 4 9 69 Storm Control Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as pps or bps The default value is bps e Preamble IFG S
86. ANnG FOFWANG parra A ae AA AAA AAA AA e 343 D AUTO NC OU AA 345 5 TROUBLES HOO TIN Gucci cialis tail 346 APPENDIX Asa aaa 348 A 1 Switeh s RJ4S PIN ASSION MENS ari A 348 A 2 10100MDpS 10 T00BASE Tits 348 1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing IFS POC2502 Managed Switch which comes with multiple POC female BNC connectors Gigabit Ethent copper and SFP fiber optic connectibility and robust layer 2 and layer 4 features The description of this model is shown below ol OA AED 8 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch ORSAI OS ASAS 16 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch POC Managed Switch is used as an alternative name in this user s manual 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the POC Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items The Power Over Coax Managed Switch x 1 Quick Installation Guide x 1 Rubber Feet x 4 Power Cord x 1 RS232 to RJ45 Console Cable x 1 SFP Dust Cap x 2 BNC Female Dust Cap x 8 POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S BNC Female Dust Cap x 16 POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S Warning Sticker x 8 POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S Warning Sticker x 16 POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S Rack mount Accessory Kit x 1 If any item is found missing or damaged please contact your local reseller for replacement 10 1 2 Product Description Power Over Coax Solution enables all enterprises and network
87. CP QoS priority and remarking It guarantees the best performance for VoIP and video stream transmission and empowers the enterprises to take full advantage of the limited network resources Powerful Security IFS IFS POC2502 Managed Switch offers comprehensive IPv4 IPv6 Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge lt can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address TCP UDP ports or defined typical network applications lts protection mechanism also comprises 802 1X port based user and device authentication which can be deployed with RADIUS to ensure the port level security and block illegal users With the Protected Port function communication between edge ports can be prevented to guarantee user privacy Furthermore Port Security function allows limiting the number of network devices on a given port 14 Advanced Network Security The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch also provides DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address The network administrators can now build highly secured corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before Friendly and Secure Management For efficient management the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch is equipped with console Web Telnet and SNMP management interfaces With the built in Web based management interface
88. Click to apply changes GVRP Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 5 14 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 129 Object Description e GVRP Status Display the current GVRP status e Join Timeout Display the current join timeout parameter e Leave Timeout Display the current leave timeout parameter e LeaveAll Timeout Display the current leaveall timeout parameter 4 5 11 GVRP Port Setting The GVRP Port Setting Status screens in Figure 4 5 15 Figure 4 5 16 appear Port settings Port Select Select GVRP Enabled Registration Mode Vlan Creation Apply Figure 4 5 15 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port e GVRP Enabled Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on port e Registration Mode By default GVRP ports are in normal registration mode These ports use GVRP join messages from neighboring switches to prune the VLANs running across the 802 1Q trunk link If the device on the other side is not capable of sending GVRP messages or if you do not want to allow the switch to prune any of the VLANs use the fixed mode Fixed mode ports will forward for all VLANs that exist in the switch database Ports in forbidden mode forward only for VLAN 1 e VLAN Creation GVRP can dynamically create VLANs on switches for trunking purpos
89. Consumption Screenshot This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings as Figure 4 16 3 shows Power Allocation W a Figure 4 16 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e PoE Mode There are three modes for PoE mode NW Enable enable PoE function W Disable disable PoE function 332 e Schedule Buttons Apply Priority Current Used mA Power Used W Power Allocation Click to apply changes NW Schedule enable PoE function in schedule mode Indicates the scheduled profile mode Possible profiles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 The Priority represents PoE ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in case the total power consumption is over the total power budget In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turned off and offer power for the port of higher priority The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using It can limit the port PoE supply watts Per port maximum value must be less than 30 8 watts Total port values must be less than the Power Reservation value Once power overload is detected the port will auto shut down and keep in detection mode until PD s power consumption is lower than the powe
90. Disabled Disable SNTP mode operation To set time manually a Year Select the starting Year Month Select the starting month Day Select the starting day Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute Seconds Select the starting seconds Allows to select the time zone according to the current location of switch This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration Default Disabled Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e We
91. Display the current capabilities enabled e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID subtype 303 Detail o fot pam emt OO Figure 4 12 8 Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Iption e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e LLDP Status Display the current LLDP status e LLDP MED Status Display the current LLDP MED Status 4 12 5 LLDP Remote Device This page provides a status overview for all LLDP remote devices The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Remote Device screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears LLDP Remote Device Detail Delete Refresh Figure 4 12 9 LLDP Remote Device Page Screenshot 304 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port Display the current local port e Chassis ID Subtype Display the current chassis ID subtype e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID subtype e Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Time to Live Display the current time to live Buttons Delete Click to delete LLDP remote device entry Refresh Click to refresh LLDP remote device 305 4 12 6 MED Network Policy Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch iss
92. EtherType value The allowed range is 0x05DD to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value 217 Add Click to add ACE list MAC Based ACE Table Destination ACL Name Sequence 802 1p 802 1p Mask Ethertype Modify eee ____ Address Wildcard Mask te Address Wildcard Mask Figure 4 10 4 MAC based ACE Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object ACL Name Sepuence Action Destination MAC Address Destination MAC Address Mask Source MAC Address Source MAC Address Mask VLAN ID 802 1p 802 1p Mask Ethertype Modify Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current destination MAC address Display the current destination MAC address mask Display the current source MAC address Display the current source MAC address mask Display the current VLAN ID Display the current 802 1p value Display the current 802 1p mask Display the current Ethernet type Edit Click to edit MAC based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete MAC based ACL entry 2 8 4 10 3 IPv4 based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Pv4 based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 5 Figure 4 10 6 appear IPv4 Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 5 IPv4
93. FC 2819 RMON 1 2 3 9 RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB RFC 3635 Ethernet like MIB FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 1901 Broadband Power Line IEEE 802 3 10BASE T IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX 100BASE FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x flow control and back pressure IEEE 802 3ad port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of Service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 RFC 2710 MLD version 1 RFC 3810 MLD version 2 Temperature O 50 degrees C Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Temperature 10 70 degrees C Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing 22 Additional PoE output vs cable type information RG 59 Bare Copper Coaxial Cable Coaxial Cable Length POC252 1CX Maximum PoE Output W POC2502 16CXP 400 122 25 2 500 152 25 0 700 213 23 5 800 244 23 0 0 1000 1100 12 1200 366 20 6 13 1300 396 20 0 14 1400 427 19 8 15 1500 457 18 9 Above PoE outputs are based on RG 59 Bare Copper 100 1000FT DC Resistance coaxial cable at 25 C operation 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 3000 3100 3200 3300
94. FE Y MENO pa a a ruler l IPw4 or IPv Address Image Running configuration Slap configuration Backup configuration Flash log J Buffered log POC2502 160XP 27 25 SDK_305 1 50150612 Dix Backup POC2502 16CXP 2T 25 web u_v1 50150703 bix Active Backup Figure 4 16 3 Backup Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Backup Method Select backup method from this drop down list e Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Backup Type Select backup type e Image Select active or backup image Buttons Backup Click to back up image configuration or log 340 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager This function allows reloading of the current image or configuration of the POC Managed Switch to the local management station The Upgrade Manager screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears Upgrade Manager mage Startup Configuration Backup Configuration Running Configuration Oractive Backup Upgrade Figure 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Upgrade Method Select upgrade method from this drop down list e Server IP Fill in your TF TP server IP address e File Name The name of firmware image or configuration e Upgrade Type Select upgrade type e Image Select active or backup image Buttons Upgrade Click to upgrade image or configuration
95. Failures Display the current DIP Validation failures e IP MAC Mismatch Display the current IP MAC mismatch failures Failures Buttons Clear o Click to clear the statistics Refresh Click to refresh the statistics 259 4 9 8 5 Rate Limit The ARP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 57 Figure 4 9 58 appear ARP Rate Limit Setting up to 50 pps Figure 4 9 57 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e State Set default or user define e Rate Limit pps Configure the rate limit for the port policer The default value is unlimited Buttons Apply Click to apply changes ARP Rate Limit Config unlimited unlimited Figure 4 9 58 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Rate Limit pps Display the current rate limit 260 4 9 9 IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host After receiving a packet the port looks up the key attributes including IP address MAC address and VLAN tag of the packet
96. HCP messages received on a non secure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces An entry is added or removed dynamically to the DHCP snooping table when a client receives or releases an IP address from a DHCP server Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time VLAN identifier and port identifier When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Filtering rules are implemented as follows 241 A If the global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded a If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table E If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows gt If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped gt If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message
97. IP Recedence If you want to filter a specific IP recedence with this ACE you can enter a specific IP recedence value A field for entering an IP recedence value appears The allowed range is 0 to 7 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP recedence value Specify the ICMP for this ACE Any No specifc ICMP is specified destination port status is don t care List If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE you can select a specific list value Protocol ID If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE you can enter a specific protocol ID value A field for entering a protocol ID value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE E Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care E User Defined If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value 283 Pv4 Based ACE Table te tr Destination IP Source IP Address IP Address Source Destination Port Range Flag IP ICMP ICMP o E E E jer The page includes the following fields Port IP Wildcard IP Wildcard Range Address Mask Address Mask Figure 4 10 8 IPv4 based ACE Table Page Screenshot Objec
98. Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting Status screens in Figure 4 8 22 amp Figure 4 8 23 appear 207 Properties OEnabled Disabled AB Enable OEnabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 8 22 Properites Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Voice VLAN State Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are MM Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation MM Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation e Voice VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 e Remark CoS 802 1p Select 802 1p value from this drop down list e 1p Remark Enable or disable 802 1p remark e Aging Time 30 65536 The time after which a port is removed from the Voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is min no longer received on the port Default 1440 minutes Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 208 Voice VLAN State Information Name Information Value Voice VLAN State disabled Voice VLAN ID none disable Tp Remark State disabled Aging 1440 Figure 4 8 23 Properites Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Voice VLAN State Display the curr
99. Ingress State Display the ingress state e Source TX Port Display the current TX ports e Source RX Port Display the current RX ports 4 3 6 Jumbo Frame This page provides to select the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port The Jumbo Frame screens in Figure 4 3 11 amp Figure 4 3 12 appear Jumbo Frame Setting Apply Figure 4 3 11 Jumbo Frame Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Jumbo Frame Bytes Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 64 bytes to 9216 bytes Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Jumbo Frame Config Jumbo Frame Bytes 1522 Figure 4 3 12 Jumbo Frame Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Jumbo Display the current maximum frame size 4 3 7 Port Error Disabled Configuration This page provides to set port error disable function The Port Error Disable Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 13 8 Figure 4 3 14 appear Error Disabled Recovery am Second Apply Figure 4 3 13 Error Disabled Recovery Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Recovery Interval BPDU Guard Self Loop Broadcast Flood Unknown Multicast Flood Unicast Flood ACL Port Security Violation DHCP Rate Limit ARP Rate Limt Description The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled i
100. LAN ID Buttons Appl PPlY Click to apply changes Management VLAN State Contig Name Contig Value Figure 4 5 2 Management VLAN State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Management VLAN Display the current management VLAN 4 5 4 Create VLAN Create delete VLAN on this page The screens in Figure 4 5 3 amp Figure 4 5 4 appear VLAN Setting VLAN LIST VLAN Action VLAN Name Prefix Apply Figure 4 5 3 VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e VLAN Action This column allows users to add or delete VLAN s 117 e VLAN Name Prefix Indicates the name of this particular VLAN Buttons Appl dali Click to apply changes VLAN Table VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type Figure 4 5 4 VLAN Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID entry e VLAN Name Display the current VLAN ID name e VLAN Type Display the current VLAN ID type e Modify click El to modify VLAN configuraiton 4 5 5 Interface Settings This page is used for configuring the POC Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page All untagged packets arriving to the device are ta
101. MP snooping The default value is Disabled e IGMP Snooping Version Sets the IGMP Snooping operation version Possible versions are NW v2 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 2 E v3 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 3 e IGMP Snooping Report Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast capable routers Suppression When you disable report suppression all IGMP reports are sent as is to multicast capable routers The default is enabled Buttons Apply Click to apply changes IGMP Snooping Informations Information Name Inform atio on Valu e Figure 4 7 8 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 166 Object IGMP Snooping Status IGMP Snooping Version IGMP Snooping V2 Report Suppression Description Display the current IGMP snooping status Display the current IGMP snooping version Display the current IGMP snooping v2 report suppression IGMP Snooping Table Query Robustness Router VLAN IGMP Snooping Ports Auto ID Operation Status L earn Cu The page includes the following fields Query ts Last Member te Immediate Interval sec iat delete Query count aia Leave Interval sec cal Interval sec Figure 4 7 9 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot Object Entry No VLAN ID IGMP Snooping Operation Status Router Ports Auto Learn Query Robustness Query Interval sec Query Max Response Interval sec
102. P address is as follows http 192 168 0 100 44 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of POC Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Figure 4 1 2 Login screen Default User Name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH AOC CT Ea 4 AAA 0000000000000000 ya iga GE Welcome to IFS Transmission POC2502 16CXP 2T 25 16 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP Long Reach PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch Figure 4 1 3 Default Main Page Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the POC Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the POC Managed 45 Switch provides Es En It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access POC Managed Switch The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button You need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under Web interface 46 4 1 Main Web Pa
103. Ps Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 27 amp Figure 4 9 28 appear HTTPS Settings HTTPS Service OEnabled Disabled Login Authentication List detault ession Timeout 0 86400 minutes Apply Figure 4 9 27 HTTPs Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTPs Service Disable or enable HTTPs service e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value Buttons Apply Click to apply changes HITPS Information Information Name Information Value HTTPS Service Disabled Login Authentication List default Session Timeout 10 Figure 4 9 28 HTTPs Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTPs Service Display the current HTTPs service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout 23 4 9 6 Management Access Method 4 9 6 1 Profile Rules The Profile Rule Table Setting and Table screens in Figure 4 9 29 Figure 4 9 30 appear Profile Rule Table Setting All O IPv4iMask 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 Select Ports v IPv6 Prefix 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 9 29 Profile Rule Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Name Indicates the access p
104. Reboot Reboot the POC Managed Switch Reset the POC Managed Switch to the Factory Default configuration The POC Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings shown below gt 5 sec Factory Default Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 2 1 2 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity and system power it helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 1 2A 2 1 2B shows the LED indications of these POC Managed Switches POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S LED Indication LNK ACT ifs POC2502 8CXP 2T 25 8 Port Power over C Hie Figure 2 1 2 POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S LED Panel 26 WM System Alert Function Lights to indicate that the Switch has power Lights to indicate the system is working Off to indicate the system is booting Lights to indicate that Fan 1 is down Lights to indicate that Fan 2 is down Lights to indicate that Fan 3 is down Lights to indicate that the PoE Power is down LED Color Function LNK Green Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established Lights To indicate the port is providing 56VDC in line power HM 10 100 1000BASE T interfaces GE1 to GE2 Color Function To indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT Blink To indicate that the switch is actively
105. STP port Display the current configuration BPDUs received Display the current TCN BPDUs received Display the current MSTP BPDUs received Display the configuration BPDUs transmitted Display the current TCN BPDUs transmitted Display the current BPDUs transmitted 159 4 7 Multicast This section has the following items a Properties Configures multicast properties a IGMP Snooping Configures IGMP snooping settings E IGMP Snooping Statistics Displays the IGMP snooping statistics lA MLD Snooping Configures MLD snooping settings a MLD Snooping Statistics Displays the MLD snooping statistics a Multicast Throttling Configures multicast throttling setting Setting E Multicast Filter Configures multicast filter 4 7 1 Properties This page provides multicast properties related configuration The multicast Properties and Information screen in Figure 4 7 1 amp Figure 4 7 2 appear PropertiesSetting Unknown Multicast Action Oprop Flood Router Port IPv4 Forward Method mac Src Dst lp IPv6 Forward Method MAC Src Dst lp Apply Figure 4 7 1 Properties Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unknown Multicast Unknown multicast traffic method Action Drop flood or send to router port e IPv4 Forward Method Configure the IPv4 multicast forward method e IPv6 Forward Method Configure the IPv6 multicast forward method Buttons 160 Apply Click to apply cha
106. Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Mode pps Display the current mode e Status pps Display the current status 219 e Periodic Reauthentication Display the current periodic reauthentication e Reauthentication Period Display the current reauthentication period e Quiet Period Display the current quiet period e Supplicant Timeout Display the current supplicant timeout e Max EAP Requests Display the current Max EAP requests e Modify Click Edit to edit 802 1X port setting parameter 4 9 1 4 Guest VLAN Setting Overview When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meantime the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identit
107. Service Display the current SSH service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Enable Authentication List Display the current enable authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout e Password Retry Count Display the current password retry count e Silent Time Display the current silent time e Current SSH Session Count Display the current SSH session count 4 9 5 3 HTTP The HTTP Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 25 amp Figure 4 9 26 appear HTTP Settings HTTP Service SEnabled Disabled Login Authentication List default Session Timeout i0 0 86400 minutes Apply Figure 4 9 25 HTTP Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTP Service Disable or enable HTTP service Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list Session Timeout Set the session timeout value Buttons Appl ERa Click to apply changes 235 HTTP Information Information Name Information Value HTTP Service Enabled Login Authentication List default CO Figure 4 9 26 HTTP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTP Service Display the current HTTP service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout 236 4 9 5 4 HTTPs The HTT
108. Size ICMP Fragment Packets IPv4 Ping Max Packet Size IPv6 Ping Max Packet Size Smurf Attack TCP Syn SPORT lt 1024 Null Scan Attack X Mas Scan Attack TCP SYN FIN Attack TCP SYN RST Attack TCP Fragment Offset 1 The page includes the following fields Figure 4 9 67 DoS Information Page Screenshot 269 Object DMAC SMAC Land Attach UDP Blat TCP Blat POD IPv6 Min Fragment ICMP Fragments IPv4 Ping Max Size IPv6 Ping Max Size Smurf Attack TCP Min Header Length TCP SYN SPORT lt 1024 Null Scan Attack X Mas Scan Attack TCP SYN FIN Attack TCP SYN RST Attack TCP Fragment Offset 1 4 9 11 2 DoS Port Setting Description Display the current DMAC SMAC status Display the current land attach status Display the current UDP blat status Display the current TCP blat status Display the current POD status Display the current IPv6 min fragment status Display the current ICMP fragment status Display the current IPv4 ping max size status Display the current IPv6 ping max size status Display the current smurf attack status Display the current TCP min header length Display the current TCP syn status Display the current null scan attack status Display the current x mas scan attack status Display the current TCP syn fin attack status Display the current TCP syn rst attack status Display the TCP fragment offset 1 status The DoS Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 9 68 amp Figure 4
109. T 2S Front Panel Mi Long Reach PoE BNC Interface BNC female port RG59U RG6 750 coaxial cable Up to 1 kilometer Distance is based on cable impedance Hi Gigabit TP Interface 10 100 1000BASE T Copper RJ45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters HM 100 1000BASE X SFP Slots Each of the SFP Small Form factor Pluggable slots supports dual speed 1000BASE SX LX or 100BASE FX For 1000BASE SX LX SFP transceiver module From 550 meters multi mode fiber to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber For 100BASE FX SFP transceiver module From 2 kilometers multi mode fiber to 20 40 60 kilometers single mode fiber 25 MW Console Port The console port is a RJ45 port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information including IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached DB9 to RJ45 console cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users can run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device MM Reset Button On the left of the front panel the reset button is designed to reboot the POC Managed Switch without turning off and on the power The following is the summary table of the Reset button functions Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System
110. Tree The STP Global Settings screens in Figure 4 6 4 amp Figure 4 6 5 appear 146 Global Setting Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Enable e BPDU Forward e PathCost Method Force Version Configuration Name Configuration Revision Buttons Apply Click to apply changes OEnabled Disabled flooding filtering Oshot long RSTP Opertion Y OOOO 304 F112 Max 32 charactor 0 65535 Figure 4 6 4 Global Settings Page Screenshot Description Enable or disable the STP function The default value is Disabled Set the BPDU forward method The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP Compatible RSTP Operation and MSTP Operation Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used The values allowed are between 0 and 65535 The default value is 0 STP Informations Information Name BPDU Forward Cost Method Force Version Configuration Name Configuration Revision Information Value Disabled flooding RSTP Operation 00 00 30 4F 11 22 Figure 4 6 5 STP Information Page Screenshot 147 The page includes the following fields Object Desc
111. White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above table before deploying the cables into your network 349
112. a Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information a The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch The path cost to the root from the transmitting port 140 a The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following A One switch is elected as the root switch a The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch a A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch E Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root swit
113. a member of the MLD Buttons 182 Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 4 7 5 MLD Snooping Statics This page provides MLD Snooping Statics The MLD Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4 7 33 appears MLD Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Statistics Packets Counter Invalid RA Other RX Leave Rx Report Ra General Query RA opecall Group Query RA opecall Group amp Source Query RX Leave Tx Report Ta General Query TX specail Group Query Ta specail Group Source Query TA 5 2 oie zE gt Figure 4 7 33 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Total RX Display the current total RX e Valid RX Display the current valid RX e Invalid RX Display the current invalid RX e Other RX Display the current other RX e Leave RX Display the current leave RX e Report RX Display the current report RX e General Query RX Display the current general query RX e Special Group Query Display the current special group query RX RX e Special Group amp Display the current special group source query RX 183 Source Query RX e Leave TX e Report TX e General Query TX e Special Group Query TX e Special Group amp Source Query TX Buttons Clear Display the current leave TX Display the current report TX Display the current general query TX Display the current special group query TX Display the current special group source query
114. ads you must use the DHCP snooping database agent If the agent is disabled dynamic ARP or IP source guard is enabled and the DHCP snooping binding database has dynamic bindings the switch loses its connectivity If the agent is disabled and only DHCP snooping is enabled the switch does not lose its connectivity but DHCP snooping might not prevent DCHP spoofing attacks The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location When reloading the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database The switch keeps the file current by updating it when the database changes When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings the switch immediately updates the entries in the database The switch also updates the entries in the binding file The frequency at which the file is updated is based on a configurable 247 delay and the updates are batched If the file is not updated in a specified time set by the write delay and abort timeout values the update stops The DHCP Snooping Database and Information screens in Figure 4 9 40 amp Figure 4 9 41 appear DHCP Snooping Database Database Type Remote Server AAA Or Hostname Write Delay 300 1115 86400 Sceond Apply Figure 4 9 40 DHCP Snooping Database Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Database Type Select database type e File Name The name of file image e Remote S
115. aged Switch on the desktop Step 3 Keep enough ventilation space between the POC Managed Switch and the surrounding objects When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4 under specifications Step 4 Connect the POC Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ45 ports and standard coaxial cable to POC ports on the front of the POC Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer server workstation or router fay Connection to the POC Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ45 tips For Es more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A 29 Step 5 Supply power to the POC Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the POC Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the POC Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the POC Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follow the instructions described below Step 1 Place the POC Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step 2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the POC Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 1 5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of th
116. alue appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination port value E Range If you want to filter a specific destiantion port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific destiantion port range value A field for entering a destination port value appears e TCP Flags UGR Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Unset TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Unset TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Unset TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry Unset TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry Don t Care Any value is allowed
117. an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below oom Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present o oe Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 o o Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group 164 The states a
118. ange of 100 240V AC and 50 60 Hz Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe on the rear panel of the POC Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electrical outlet and the power will be ready The device is a power required device which means it will not work till it is powered If your networks Power Notice should be active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will prevent you from network data loss or network downtime In some areas installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your POC Managed Power Notice Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the POC Managed Switch 28 2 2 Installing the Switch This section describes how to install your POC Managed Switch and make connections to the POC Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your POC Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the POC Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follow these steps Step 1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the POC Managed Switch Step 2 Place the POC Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 1 4 Ole g OCAR B Port Power over Coax Switch ee DI O ZN Figure 2 1 4 Place the POC Man
119. ast flood status Display the current unicast flood status Display the current ACL status Display the current port security violation status Display the current DHCP rate limit status Display the current ARP rate limit status 95 4 3 8 Port Error Disabled This page provides disable that transitions a port into error disable and the recovery options The ports were disabled by some protocols such as BPDU Guard Loopback and UDLD The Port Error Disable screen in Figure 4 3 15 appears v Port Error Disabled Status Error Disabled Reason Time Left Seconds Figure 4 3 15 Port Error Disable Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port Name Display the port for error disable e Error Disable Reason Display the error disabled reason of the port e Time Left Seconds Display the time left 4 3 9 Protected Ports Overview When a switch port is configured to be a member of protected group also called Private VLAN communication between protected ports within that group can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the protected group but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other internet
120. aximum number of multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded Default Deny Deny The new multicast group join report is dropped Replace The new multicast group replaces an existing group 185 IGMP Port Max Groups Information Figure 4 7 35 IGMP Port Max Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Max Groups Display the current Max groups e Action Display the current action 4 7 7 Multicast Filter In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service is based on a specific subscription plan The multicast filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port Multicast filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A multicast filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled multicast join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the multicast join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the multicast join report is dropped When you have created a Multicast profile number
121. based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a name from IPv4 based ACL list Buttons Add Click to add ACL name list v ACL Table Figure 4 10 6 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Delete Click to delete ACL name entry 4 10 4 IPv4 based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The Pv4 based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 7 Figure 4 10 8 appear 279 IPv4 Based ACE sd Range 1 2147483647 1 is first processed Permit O Deny Shutdown Any 1P Select from list Protocol ID to match O Any User Defined Ss 8 for matching 1s for no matching Any User Defined sd 8 for matching 1s for no matching O Any O Single o Range 0 65535 ORange o 6555 Range 0 65538 O Any Osingle Range 0 65535 OPRange Range 0 65535 Range 0 65535 esos Range 0 65535 UN Urg set OlUnset O Don t Care Ack Oset OUnset ODon t Care Psh Set Unset ODon t Care Rst Oset OUnset ODon t Care Syn Set OlUnset O Don t Care Fin Set OuUnset ODon t Care O Any ODSCP to match o Range D 63 OIP Precedence to match Range D 7 O Any Select from
122. bles please take care of the conditions of the resistance value of cables as follows Coaxial Cable Type RG 59 U Less than 30 2 1000 ft RG 6 U Less than 120 1000 ft In the installation steps below this Manual uses Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender as an example Connect the Coaxial Cable 1 Insert the coaxial cable with one side being the 7542 BNC plug connector into the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial interface 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device with Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender installed 3 Tighten the BNC male connector gently PoE PT Camera POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S POC252 1CX 1P Figure 2 1 8 How to insert the coaxial cable from POC Managed Switch 4 Enable Long Reach Power over Ethernet function for the all POC ports from WebUl 5 We suggest that all unused ports be turned off as output voltage will be at the BNC connector output And should have BNC cap installed for safety 34 ifs POC2502 8CXP 2T 25 o POE Configuration PoE Configuration Enable _ _ h Lom Degrees C 36 C 96 F 4 Select PoE in left column Select PoE Configuration Select Enable See All ports are now Enabled 5 Click on Apply to save A Whe LT Profi 17 lt 30 8 N N i m tic s RMON a ollo 2 Bl lt j lt Profile 1 V Q D 00 Y to h PoE Schedule PD Alive Check Enable V
123. ce the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions a Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements a Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups a Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree al Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used a The unique switch identifier The path cost to the root associated with each switch port a The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Dat
124. cessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI Media Dependent Interface Tx transmit Tx transmit Rx receive Not used IIS Rx receive Not used The standard cable RJ45 pin assignment 348 MDI X Media Dependent Interface Cross Rx receive Rx receive Tx transmit Tx transmit The standard RJ45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight through Cable 1 2 3 4 5 Crossover Cable 1 2 3 4 5 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight through and Crossover Cable SIDE 2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7
125. ch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds
126. col e Encryption Protocol Display the current encryption protocol e Access Right Display the current access right e Action Delete Delete the user entry 4 2 7 7 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv1 and 2 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 31 amp Figure 4 2 32 appear SNMPv1 2 Host Setting Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type mm Name UDP Port Timeout Retries tor lime fie enfin amnion Add Figure 4 2 31 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 76 Buttons Add Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type Community Name UDP Port Time Out Retries Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w It can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c Set the notify type in traps or informs Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 1 to 300 Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allo
127. col VLAN Group Group ID 1 8 Protocol Value Ox0600 0xF FFE Add Figure 4 5 9 Add Protocol VLAN Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values NW Ethernet Il NW IEEE802 3_ LLC Other E RFC 1042 Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Protocol Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected 0x0600 0xFFFE from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu 125 Valid values for frame type ranges from 0x0600 Oxfffe Buttons Appl PPlY Click to apply changes Protocol VLAN Group State Group ID Frame Type Protocol Value Figure 4 5 10 Protocol VLAN Group State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Display the current group ID e Frame Type Display the current frame type e Protocol Value Display the current protocol value e Delete Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 4 5 9 Protocol VLAN Port Setting This page allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN port for the switch The Protocol VLAN Port Setting State screens in Figure 4 5 11 amp Figure 4 5 12 appear Protocol VLAN Port Setting Select Ports cGroup iol Ovianior so
128. creens in Figure 4 9 54 amp Figure 4 9 55 appear DAI Port Setting sre Mac Chk Dst Mac Chk IP Chk IP Allow Zero Select Ports Apply The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Port Type Src Mac Chk Dst Mac Chk IP Chk IP Allow Zero Un Trusted O Trusted Disabled QEnabled Disabled O Enabled Disabled O Enabled Disabled Enabled Figure 4 9 54 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot Description Select port from this drop down list Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Default All interfaces are untrusted Enable or disable to checks the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender MAC address in the ARP body This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses When enabled packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped Enable or disable to checks the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the target MAC address in ARP body This check is performed for ARP responses When enabled packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped Enable or disable to checks the source and destination IP addresses of ARP packets The all zero all one or multicast IP addresses are considered invalid and the corresponding packets are discarded Enable o
129. ct port from this drop down list Enable or disable the port security The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions E Forward Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action E Shutdown If Limit MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected 265 and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 2 Click the Reopen button E Discard If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port it will trigger the action that do not learn the new MAC and drop the package Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Port Security Status SEA Disabled 8197 Forward Disabled 8192 Forward LAG Diselllea 8192 LAGE Disebles 8192
130. ctets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets E Pkts158to255Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets E Pkts256to511Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets E Pkts512to1023Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets E Pkts1024to1518Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Sample interval 1 2147483647 The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are E Absolute Get the sample directly default 320 Buttons Apply Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Falling Event Owner Click to apply changes Rmon Alarm NW Delta Calculate the difference between samples Rising threshold value 0 214
131. d Switch The MLD Router Setting screens in Figure 4 7 27 amp Figure 4 7 28 appear Router Port VLA iN i ID Ti AT tic Po act DI b ic J P Add Figure 4 7 27 Add Router Port Page Screenshot 179 The page includes the following fields Object e VLANID e Type e Static Ports Select Forbid Port Select Buttons Add Description Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router Sets the Router port type The types of Router port as below Static Forbid Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier Specify which ports un act as router ports Click to add MLD router port entry MLD Router Ports Status Figure 4 7 28 Router Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e VLANID Static Ports e Forbidden Ports e Modify Description Display the current VLAN ID Display the current static ports Display the current forbidden ports Edit Click to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 180 4 7 4 5 MLD Router Table This page provides Router Table The Dynamic Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4 7 29 Figure 4 7 30 Figure 4 7 31 appear Dynamic Router Table Pon Tesi Tine Sea Figure 4 7 29 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the fol
132. d aii srta bi 100Base FX S20 2MLC 2 100Base FX 2 Multi mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 2km 20 14 32 12 0 50 C S25 2MLC 2 100Base FX 2 Multi mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 2km 20 14 32 12 40 75 C 100Base LX 20 2SLC 20 100Base LX 2 Single mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 20km 15 8 34 19 O 50 C 25 2SLC 20 100Base LX 2 Single mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 20km 15 8 34 19 40 75 C 100Base BX 20 1SLC A 20 100Base BX20 U 1 Single mode LC 1310nm 1550nm 20km 14 8 32 18 O 50 C 20 1SLC B 20 100Base BX20 D 1 Single mode LC 1550nm 1310nm 20km 14 8 32 18 O 50 C 31 Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver 1000BASX LX BX Fiber Bi Directional SFP Gigabit 1000Mbps PHY Type Fiber Type Connector A a rd aaa Ha aid Copper RJ45 S30 RJ SFP 1000T Copper RJ 45 400m gt 0 50 C 1000Base SX S30 2MLC 1000Base SX 2 Multi mode LC 850nm 850nm 220m 550m 9 5 4 17 7 5 0 50 C S35 2MLC 1000Base SX 2 Multi mode LC 850nm 850nm 220m 550m 9 5 4 ag 7 5 40 75 C S30 2MLC 2 1000Base SX2 2 Multi mode ICG 1310nm 1310nm 2km 9 1 19 10 O 50 C 1000Base LX LHX ZX 30 2SLC 10 1000Base LX 2 Single mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 10km 9 5 3 20 10 5 0 50 C 35 2SLC 10 1000Base LX 2 Single mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 10km TRE 20 10 5 40 75 C S30 28LC 30 1000Base LHX 2 Single mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 30km B49 ES 21 0 50 C S35 2SLC 30 1000Base LHX 2 Single mode LC 1310nm 1310nm 30km DIET 23 21 40 75
133. d that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN The Voice Auto Mode Configuration Network Policy Configuration and LLDP MED Network Policy Table screens in Figure 4 12 10 amp Figure 4 12 11 appear 306 Volce Auto Mode Configuration Auto O Manual Apply Network Policy Configuration Voice 1 4094 Figure 4 12 10 Voice Auto Mode Configuration and Network Policy Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LLDP MED Policy for Set the LLDP MED policy for voice application mode Voice Application e Network Policy Select network policy number for this drop down list Number e Application Type Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a
134. d the System Name is included in LLDP information transmitted E Port Description When checked the Port Description is included in LLDP information transmitted E System Description When checked the System Description is included in LLDP information transmitted NW System Capability When checked the System Capability is included in LLDP information transmitted 300 NW 802 3 MAC PHY When checked the 802 3 MAC PHY is included in LLDP information transmitted NW 802 3 Link Aggregation When checked the 802 3 Link Aggregation is included in LLDP information transmitted NW 802 3 Maximun Frame Size When checked the 802 3 Maximun Frame Size is included in LLDP information transmitted E Management Address When checked the Management Address is included in LLDP information transmitted NW 802 1 PVID When checked the 802 1 PVID is included in LLDP information transmitted Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes LLDP Port Status Selected Optional TLVs Ela 802 1 PWID EE 802 1 PWID els 802 1 PWID GEA 802 1 PWID a 802 1 PWID de TAGRA 902 1 P ID Figure 4 12 4 LLDP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e State Display the current LLDP status e Selected Optional Display the current selected optional TLVs TLVs 301 The VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection and LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status sc
135. d the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the POC Managed Switch are public in e E ra inden Pago JE q a PC Workstation with Managed Switch E SNMP application SNMP Agent Status Enabled A IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 x Figure 3 1 5 SNMP management 3 6 IFS Smart Discovery Utility For easily listing the POC Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment the IFS Smart Discovery Utility from user s manual CD ROM is an ideal solution The following installation instructions are to guide you to running the IFS Smart Discovery Utility 1 Deposit the IFS Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC 2 Run this utility as the following screen appears a O File Option Help fuacas es Device Name Version Device NewParswendIP Address NetMack Gateway Description ss i Select Adapter 182168 0 246 50 26 0418 31 09 I Cobo Padoa Foce Esgadcast Diente Figure 3 1 6 IFS Smart Discovery Utility Screen 42 If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC choose a different LAN card by using the Select Adapter tool 1 SCFE 1A 00 0011 POC250280 P vi 06150514_ 1921680151 2 AS F7E001 2F 85 NS3600 287 45 v1 Sb140703 1921580104
136. de assumes that RADIUS and TACACS servers have already been configured to support AAA The configuration of RADIUS and TACACS server software is beyond the scope of this guide refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS or TACACS server software 229 4 9 4 1 Login List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 17 amp Figure 4 9 18 appear mm Authentication List List Nam ethod 2 hod 3 Meth e e a Add Figure 4 9 17 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list e Method 1 4 Set the login authentication method Empty None Local TACACS RADIUS Enable Buttons Add Click to add authentication list Login Authentication Lists CI IN CN Figure 4 9 18 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 230 4 9 4 2 Enable List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 19 amp Figure 4 9 20 appear Authentication List List Name Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 a e a Add Figure 4 9 19 New Authentication List Screenshot
137. designed to be the same as trunk ID LACP selection logic status of the port E S means selected E U means unselected E D means standby LACP mux state machine status of the port E DETACH means the port is in detached state E WAIT means waiting state E ATTACH means attach state E CLLCT means collecting state E DSTRBT means distributing state LACP receive state machine status of the port E INIT means the port is in initialize state PORTds means port disabled state EXPR means expired state LACPds means LACP disabled state DFLT means defaulted state E CRRNT means current state LACP periodic transmission state machine status of the port E no PRD means the port is in no periodic state E FstPRD means fast periodic state E SIwWPRD means slow periodic state E PrdTX means periodic TX state The actor state field of LACP PDU description The field from left to right describes LACP_ Activity LACP_ Timeout Aggregation Synchronization Collecting Distributing Defaulted and Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web shows _ if the contents are true the web shows A P Q S C D F and E for each content respectively The partner state field of LACP PDU description The field from left to ri
138. dia type for example 1000BASE SX to 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX to 1000BASE LX Check whether the fiber optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement gt Toconnectto 1000BASE SX SFP transceiver please use the multi mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnect to 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver please use the single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type 32 Connect the Fiber Cable 1 Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFP transceiver installed 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the POC Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails To function with some fiber NICs or media converters user has to set the port Link mode to 1000 Force or 100 Force E Remove the Transceiver Module 1 Make sure there is no network activity anymore 2 Remove the fiber optic cable gently 3 Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position 4 Pull out the module gently through the lever wt P Figg ona Ld iT Ji if SX LX SFP ot Figure 2 1 8 How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it into a horizontal position Directly pulling out the module cou
139. e on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web based Management supports Internet Explorer 8 0 lt is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE8 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to A explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The POC Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection making sure the manager PC must be set on the same IP subnet address as the POC Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the POC Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the POC Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch _ y RJ45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 1 1 Web Management m Logging on the switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 8 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default I
140. e Display the current write view name e Notify View Name Display the current notify view name e Action Delete Delete the access group entry 4 2 7 5 SNMP Community Configure SNMP Community on this page The SNMP Community screens in Figure 4 2 27 Figure 4 2 28 appear Community Setting Add Figure 4 2 27 Community Setting Page Screenshot 13 The page includes the following fields Object e Community Name e Community Mode e Group Name e View Name e Access Right Buttons Apply Description Indicates the community read write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 16 Indicates the SNMP community supported mode Possible versions are NW Basic Set SNMP community mode supported version 1 and 2c NW Advanced Set SNMP community mode supported version 3 A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 Indicates the SNMP community type operation Possible types are RO Read Only Set access string type in read only mode RW Read Write Set access string type in read write mode Click to apply changes Figure 4 2 28 Community Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Community Name e Group Name e View Name e Access Right e Delete Descrip
141. e Key String The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the RADIUS server and the switch Buttons Pion Click to apply changes New Radius Server By IP address OBy name 1812 0 65535 1813 0 65535 Muse Default 1 30 secs 0 65535 0 2000 OLogin O 3802 1x All Add Figure 4 9 11 New Radius Server Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 224 Buttons Add Object Server Definition Server IP Authetication Port Acct Port Key String Timeout for Reply Retries Server Priority Dead Time Usage Type Description Set the server definition Address of the Radius server IP name The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server The shared key shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch The Timeout which can be set to a number between 1 and 30 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the
142. e POC Managed Switch Figure 2 1 5 Attach Brackets to the POC Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step 3 Secure the brackets tightly Step 4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step 5 After the brackets are attached to the POC Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 1 6 Figure 2 1 6 Mounting POC Managed Switch in a Rack 30 Step 6 Proceeds with Steps 4 and 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the POC Managed Switch 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the POC Managed Switch as the Figure 2 1 7 shows 1000Base SX LX LC Fiber Figure 2 1 7 Plug in the SFP transceiver Approved IFS SFP Transceivers IFS POC2502 Managed Switch supports both single mode and multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved IFS SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication SFP Transceiver Modules Fast Ethernet Transceiver 100Base X SFP Fast 100Mbps Sede es dels A eae dh ee one amc Ste
143. e applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the POC Managed Switch PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch A mA y IP Address 192 168 0 100 RJ45 UTP Cable Figure 3 1 3 Web Management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the POC Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the POC Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 0 or later Google Chrome Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later A pem l GEZ GEa COCCCOCCCOCCOO00C0O EZ FEi FE FES FES FES FES FEF FER FED FEI FEV FEZ FREI FEI FES FEI 3 GE3 q a o PD QQ SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH POCI PTS Welcome to IFS Transmission POC2502 16CXP 2T 25 16 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP Long Reach PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch Figure 3 1 4 Web Main Screen of POC Managed Switch 41 3 5 SNMP based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the POC Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string an
144. e binding table E IP and MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table e Max Binding Entry The maximum number of IP source guard that can be secured on this port Buttons 262 Appl PPly Click to apply changes IP Source Guard Port Information Verify Source Max Binding Entry Current Binding Entry disabled Mo limited LAGE disabled F Mo limited O Figure 4 9 61 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Status Display the current status e Verify Source Display the current verify source e Max Binding Entry Display the current max binding entry e Current Binding Entry Display the current binding entry 4 9 9 2 Binding Table The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4 9 62 amp Figure 4 9 63 appear lp Source Guard Static Binding Entry Add Figure 4 9 62 IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 263 Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e MAC Address Sourcing MAC address is allowed e IP Address Sourcing IP address is allowed Buttons Add Click to add authentication list Figure 4 9 63 IP Source Guard Binding Table Status Page Screenshot The pa
145. e supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the POC Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This POC Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS Local user name and Priviledge Level control 213 4 9 1 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States a Device Roles With 802
146. e which is used to identify the active LACP The POC Managed Switch with the lowest value has the highest priority and is selected as the active LACP peer of the trunk group Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes LACP Information Information Name Information Value aystem Priority Spe EA Figure 4 4 9 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority Display the current system priority 107 4 4 5 LACP Port Setting This page is used to configure the LACP port setting The LACP Port Setting screens in Figure 4 4 10 amp Figure 4 4 11 appear LACP Port Settings Fort Select Priority Timeout Apply Figure 4 4 10 LACP Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list to set LACP port setting e Priority The Priority controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority e Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Short will transmit LACP packets each second while Long will wait for 30 seconds before sending an LACP packet Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes LACP Port Information GES Long F
147. ecific list with this ACE you can select a specific list value Protocol ID If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE you can enter a specific protocol ID value A field for entering a protocol ID value appears The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care User Defined If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value 289 IPv6 Based ACE Table E a a Pome Name Destination IP Source IP Address Source Port Destination Port Range Flag IP ICMP ICMP T Pu E E er The page includes the following fields IP Wildcard IP Wildcard Range Address Mask Address Mask Figure 4 10 12 IPv6 based ACE Table Page Screenshot Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Source Port Range Destination Port Range Flag Set DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type ICMP Code Modify 4 10 7 ACL Binding Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the curren
148. ed Switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power The PoE schedule function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or enterprises save power and money It also increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non business hours i 3 mu gt i ak Power Power Power Power E E E EZ a E E E 6 Watts 6 Watts 12 Watts 12 Watts 5 Watts 6 Watts 12 Watts 12 Watts Save 24 watts hr during off business hours A See eon or a eee ee Total Saved 10800 Watts month PoE Usage Monitoring Via the power usage chart in the web management interface the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch enables the administrator to monitor the status of the power usage of the connected PDs in real time Thus it greatly enhances the management efficiency of the facilities PoE Over temperature Protection System The over temperature protection of the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch offers a safe and stable PoE operation by limiting the Output power in order to avoid destructive breakdown due to unexpected overheating 13 Environment friendly Smart Fan Design for Silent Operation The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch features a 19 inch metal housing a low noise design and an effective ventilation system It supports the smart fan technology to automatically control the speed of the built in fan to
149. ed from the RAM to FLASH by saving Source File Running Configuration to Destination File Startup Configuration so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file which is called configuration save To prevent illicit file upload and easier configuration switch mandates the name of running configuration file to be running config e Startup Configuration Refers to the configuration sequence used in switch startup Startup configuration file stores in nonvolatile storage corresponding to the so called configuration save lf the device supports multi config file name the configuration file to be cfg file the default is startup cfg If the device does not support multi config file mandates the name of startup configuration file to be startup config 49 e Backup Configuration The backup configuration is empty in FLASH please save the backup configuration first by Maintenance gt Backup Manager Buttons Appl PP Y Click to save configuration 4 1 2 1 Saving Configuration In the POC Managed Switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence of running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by Save Configurations to FLASH function so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file which is called configuration save To save all applied changes and set the current confi
150. ed or received on all local interfaces The LLDP Global and Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 12 17 amp Figure 4 12 18 appear LLDP Global Statistics Clear Refresh Insertions Deletions ee AN Figure 4 12 17 LLDP Global Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Insertions Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Deletions Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Drops Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full e Age Outs Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Buttons 313 Clear E i Click to clear the statistics Refresh Click to refresh the statistics LLDP Port Statistics Figure 4 12 18 LLDP Port Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e TX Frame Total The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port e RX Frame Total The number of LLDP frames received on the port e RX Frame Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from
151. ed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value e Destination Port Specify the destination port for this ACE E Any No specifc destination port is specified destination port status is don t care NW Single If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE you can enter a specific destiantino port value A field for entering a destiantino port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this destination port value E Range If you want to filter a specific destiantion port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific destiantion port range value A field for entering a destination port value appears e TCP Flags UGR Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE NW Set TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry m Unset TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry E Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE NW Set TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry NW Unset TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry E Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE NW Set TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this e
152. eenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list to create new index or modify index e Index Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are NW none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol SNMP Trap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol E Log and Trap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public e Owner Indicates the owner of this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string e Description Indicates description of this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string 322 Buttons Appl PptY Click to apply changes Figure 4 14 3 RMON Event Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current event index e Event Type Display the current event type e Community Display the current community for SNMP trap e Description Display the current event description e Last Sent Time Display the current last sent time e Owner Display the current event owner e Action Click Delete
153. efault Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Default Value Enable state STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge Priority 32 768 User Changeable STA Parameters 32768 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 seconds 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge 143 ES The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identi
154. efix Length e Destination IP Address e Destination IP Address Value e Destination IP Prefix Length e Source Port Description Select ACL name from this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned E Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped NW Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Specify the protocol filter for this ACE E Any IP No protocol filter is specified NW Select from list If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and select protocol for this drop down list Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE E Any No source IP address filter is specified W User Defined If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the source IP address filter you can enter a specific source IP address The legal format is Xxxx XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value When User Defined is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE E Any No destination IP address filter is specified E User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this
155. eir being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space e Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters e Transmit Unicast The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted Packets to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent 86 e Transmit Unknown The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted Unicast Packets to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent e Transmit Discarded The number of inbound packets which is chosen to be discarded even though no Packets errors have been detected to prevent from being delivered to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space e Received Multicast The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer is Packets addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer e Received Broadcast The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer Packets addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer e Transmit Multicast The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted Packets and is addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent e Transmit B
156. ek Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute 98 Buttons Appl dia Click to apply changes System Time informations information Name Information Value Current Date Time 09 13 10 DFLUTO 5 Jan 01 2000 SNTP Disabled Daylight Saving Time Offset A O ME E _ E A Figure 4 2 9 Time Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Current Data Time Display the current data time e SNTP Display the current SNTP state e Time Zone Display the current time zone e Daylight Saving Time Display the current daylight saving time state e Daylight Saving Time Display the current daylight saving time offset state Offset e From Display the current daylight saving time from e To Display the current daylight saving time to 99 4 2 5 2 SNTP Server Settings The SNTP Server Configuration screens in Figure 4 2 10 Figure 4 2 11 appear SNTP Server Settings o EXA or Hostname 1 65535 Default 123 Apply Figure 4 2 10 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNTP Server Address Type the IP address or domain name of the SNTP server e Server Port Type the port number of the SNTP Buttons Appl Epy Click to apply changes SNTP Server Informations Information Name
157. enshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 802 1x Informations 302 1X Disabled Figure 4 9 4 802 1X Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Display the current 802 1X state 217 4 9 1 3 802 1X Port Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X Port Setting The 802 1X Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 5 Figure 4 9 6 appear 802 1x Port Setting Select Ports tion Enabl lo Disable Enable Range 30 65535 Default 3600 0 65535 Default 60 30 Range 1 6535 Default 30 2 Range 1 10 Default 2 Apply Figure 4 9 5 802 1X Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Mode If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available E No Authentication NW Authentication NW Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication NW Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when
158. ent voice VLAN state e Voice VLAN ID Display the current voice VLAN ID e Remark CoS 802 1p Display the current remark CoS 802 1p e 1p Remark Display the current 1p remark e Aging Display the current aging time 4 8 5 3 Telephony OUI MAC Setting Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 8 24 amp Figure 4 8 25 appear Voice VLAN OUI Setting Figure 4 8 24 Voice VLAN OUI Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 209 e OUI Address A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description User defined text that identifies the VoIP devices Buttons Add Ss Click to add voice VLAN OUI setting Voice VLAN OUI Group OUI Address Description Mo dity 00 E0 BE Edit Delete 00 03 66 Cisco Edit Delete 20 60 75 Vert 00 0018 T OU ES Slemens Figure 4 8 25 Voice VLAN OUI Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e OUI Address Display the current OUI address e Description Display the current description e Modify Click Edit to edit voice VLAN OUI group parameter Click Delete to delete voice VLAN OUI group parameter 210 4 8 5 4 Telephony OUI Port Setting The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN
159. er If connected with non IFS POC2502 extender equipment it might cause damage to the equipment 2 After the POC PoE port is enabled the pin center of the coaxial cable has electricity Do not touch the pin center or connect this end to any non IFS POC2502 equipment 36 To Disable unused ports or all ports FE1 FE2 FE3 FES FES FEG FET FES 00000000 i ifs SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH POC2502 8CXP 2T 25 di POE Configuration Port Management i Link Aggregation Ms VLAN 7 PoE Configuration System PoE Admin Mode a To Disable the Ports Pe 1 Select PoE in left column 3 Select Disable 4 Verify all ports Disable 5 Click on Apply to save Spanning Tree Disable Vv Critical Vv Disable Y Critical Y Al A o chnequie Disab Critical VY PD Alive Check Disab Critical W Disab rofile 1 Critical w Disab rofile 1 Critical Y Disab rofile 1 Critical Y D Le Disab rofile Critical w Apply Refresh 5 37 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the POC Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system lt also contains information about port connecti
160. er mode support IGMP snooping port filtering MLD snooping port filtering 17 Security Mi Authentication IEEE 802 1x port based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers RADIUS TACACS login user access authentication Mi Access Control List Pv4 IPv6 IP based ACL MAC based ACL Mi MAC Security Static MAC MAC filtering Mi Port security for source MAC address entries filtering Mi DHCP snooping to filter untrusted DHCP messages Mi Dynamic ARP inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding Mi P source guard prevents IP spoofing attacks Mi DoS attack prevention Mi SSH SSL Management Mi Pv4 and IPv6 dual stack management Mi Switch management interface Web switch management Telnet command line interface SNMP v1 v2c and v3 SSH SSL secure access Mi User privilege levels control M Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client HM BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment Mi System maintenance Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP Configuration upload download through Web interface Dual images Hardware reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default Mi SNIP Network Time Protocol Mi Cable diagnostics Mi Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP and LLDP MED Mi SNMP trap for interface linkup and linkdown notification Mi Event message logging to remote Syslog server Mi Four RMON groups history
161. erver Fill in your remote server IP address e Write Delay Specify the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the binding database changes The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds The default is 300 seconds 5 minutes e Timeout Specify when to stop the database transfer process after the binding database changes The range is from 0 to 86400 Use 0 for an infinite duration The default is 300 seconds 5 minutes Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 248 DHCP Snooping Database Informations Information Name Information Value Database Type None Remote Server Figure 4 9 41 DHCP Snooping Database Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Database Type Display the current database type e File Name Display the current file name e Remote Server Display the current remote server e Write Delay Display the current write delay e Timeout Display the current timeout 4 9 7 7 Rate Limit After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 42 amp Figure 4 9 43 appear DHCP Rate Limit Setting GS Default O User Define 1300 pps Figure 4 9 42 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 249 e Port e State e Rate Limit pps Buttons Apply Select por
162. es By enabling GVRP dynamic VLAN creation a switch will add VLANs to its database when it receives GVRP join messages about VLANs it does not have Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 130 GVRP Port Status fs ew o ema Os one Pe fa e LAGE CRA Normal Enabled LAG D A Normal Enabled LAGS ERA EREN Figure 4 5 16 GVRP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Enable Status Display the current GVRP port staste e Registration Mode Display the current registration mode e VLAN Creation Status Display the current VLAN creation status 131 4 5 12 GVRP VLAN The GVRP VLAN Database screen in Figure 4 5 17 appears GVRP VLAN Database Figure 4 5 17 GVRP VLAN Database Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Dynamic Ports Display the current dynamic ports e VLAN Type Display the current VLAN type 4 5 13 GVRP Statistics The GVRP Port Statistics and Error Statistics screens in Figure 4 5 18 amp Figure 4 5 19 appear GVRP Port Statistics Clear Refresh LAG 0D Uru 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 5 18 GVRP Port Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Join Empty Rx Tx Display the current
163. es are supported E emerg Emergency level of the system unsable for log view alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for log view crit Critical level of the critical conditions for log view error Error level of the error conditions for log view warning Warning level of the warning conditions for log view notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for log view info Informational level of the informational messages for log view debug Debug level of the debugging messages for log view e Category The category of the log view includes AAA ACL CABLE_DIAG DAI DHCP_SNOOPING Dot1X GVRP IGMP_SNOOPING IPSG L2 LLDP Mirror MLD_SNOOPING Platform PM Port PORT SECURITY QoS Rate SNMP and STP Buttons nal Click to view log Logging Information Information Name Information Value Severity emerg alert crit error warning notice AAA ACL CABLE_DIAG DAI DHCP_SNOOPING Dot1X GVRP IGMP_SNOOPING IPSG L2 LLDP Mirror MLD_SNOOPING Platform PM Port PORT_SECURITY QoS Rate SNMP STP Security suite System Trunk VLAN Category Figure 4 2 19 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target Display the current log target e Severity Display the current log severity e Category Display the current log category e Total Entries Display the current log entries 66 Logging Messages Clear buffered messages
164. et the excluded or included interframe gap Buttons Appl FRN Click to apply changes Storm Control Global Information Information Name Information Value Preamble amp IFG Excluded Figure 4 9 70 Storm Control Global Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Display the current unit e Preamble IFG Display the current preamble amp IFG 2 2 4 9 12 2 Port Setting Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There are three types of storm rate control E Broadcast storm rate control B Unknown Unicast storm rate control o Unknow Multicast storm rate contro The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unknown unicast unknown multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screens in Figure 4 9 71 amp Figure 4 9 72 appear storm Control Setting Port Port State Ac Type Enable Type Enable Rate Kbps Disable Select Ports Unknown Multicast Enable CI Unknown Unicast fico Apply Figure 4 9 71 Storm Control Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e Port State Enable or disable the storm control status for the given storm type e Action Configures the action performed when storm control is over rate on a port Valid values are Shutdown or Drop e Type Enable The settings in a particula
165. f the logical port e Type Display the current type e Chaddr Check Display the current chaddr check 4 9 7 5 Statistics The DHCP Snooping Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 39 appears DHCP Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Figure 4 9 39 DHCP Snooping Statistics Page Screenshot 246 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Forwarded Display the current forwarded e Chaddr Check Dropped Display the chaddr check dropped e Untrust Port Dropped Display untrust port dropped e Untrust Port with Display untrust port with option82 dropped Option82 Dropped e Invaild Dropped Display invalid dropped Buttons Clear o Click to clear the statistics Refresh o Click to refresh the statistics 4 9 7 6 Database Agent Overview of the DHCP Snooping Database Agent When DHCP snooping is enabled the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store information about untrusted interfaces The database can have up to 8192 bindings Each database entry binding has an IP address an associated MAC address the lease time in hexadecimal format the interface to which the binding applies and the VLAN to which the interface belongs A checksum value the end of each entry is the number of bytes from the start of the file to end of the entry Each entry is 72 bytes followed by a space and then the checksum value To keep the bindings when the switch relo
166. ffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s The QoS page of the POC Managed Switch contains three types of QoS mode the 802 1p mode DSCP mode or Port base mode can be selected Both the three mode rely on predefined fields within the packet to determine the output queue sl 802 1p Tag Priority Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the IEEE 802 1p VLAN priority tag El IP DSCP Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the TOS or DSCP field in the IP packets El Port Base Priority Mode Any packet received from the specify high priority por
167. fier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at
168. file ID Port Select Select Pors gt Apply Figure 4 7 40 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Filter Profile ID Select filter profile ID from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Port Filter Status Figure 4 7 41 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 189 Object e Port e Filter Profile ID e Action Description Display the current port Display the current filter profile ID Click Show to display detail profile parameter Click Delete 1 delete the MLD filter profile entry 190 4 8 Quality of Service 4 8 1 Understand QoS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter lt also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying tra
169. g bits NW Pkts The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received and transmitted E BroadcastPkts The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets NW MulticastPkts The total number of good frames received that were directed 324 e Sample Interval e Sample Type to this multicast address E CRCAlignErrors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors NW UnderSizePkts The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed NW OverSizePkts The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed E Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error E Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error E Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment E Pkts64Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received andtransmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets E Pkts64to172O
170. gap 1 Add Figure 4 5 11 Protocol VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 126 Object e Port e Group e VLAN Buttons Add Description Select port from this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port Select group ID from this drop down list to protocol VLAN group VLAN ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group Click to add protocol VLAN port entry Protocol VLAN Port State Pot Stroup iD LAN ID Figure 4 5 12 Protocol VLAN Port State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port Group ID e VLAN ID e Delete Description Display the current port Display the current group ID Display the current VLAN ID Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 127 4 5 10 GVRP Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network GVRP enabled Switches VLAN Table a a Switch 4 Switch B GVRP Enable GVRP Enable Switch A New VLAN ID Manually Added VLAN Table VLAN Table _ VLAN 1 GVRP Joins packet Switch A WID 20 Switch B GVRP Enable GVRP Enable New VLAN Manually Added VID 20 Switch B Learning Dynamic VLAN from Switch A VLAN Table VLAN 1 mt VLAN 20 EXA Switch A GVRP Enable GVRP Enable VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propa
171. gated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch The GVRP Global Setting Information screens in Figure 4 5 13 amp Figure 4 5 14 appear GVRP Global Setting GVRP Disable Enable LeaveAll Timeout 65 32765 centiseconds Apply Figure 4 5 13 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 128 Object Description e GVRP Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on this switch e Join Timeout The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 16375 centiseconds Default 20 centiseconds e Leave Timeout The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 45 32760 centiseconds Default 60 centiseconds e LeaveAll Timeout The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 65 32765 centiseconds Default 1000 centiseconds Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer Buttons Appl PPly
172. ge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request eo EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Q _ Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 9 2 EAP Message Exchange a Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1 X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated clie
173. ge The POC Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the POC Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the POC Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu POC Port Link Status Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status A FE FES FE4 FES FES FEB FEO FEO FEW FEI FEW FEI FEW FE its SS SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH POC PoC PT PR Welcome to IFS Transmission POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S 16 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP Long Reach PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Panel Display The Web agent displays an image of the POC Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link POC Ports 0 O ul P7 RJ45 Ports ia SFP Ports i Main Menu Using the onboard Web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the POC Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can set up the POC Managed Switch by 47 selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears
174. ge for the MSTI ID is 1 15 Allow to assign VLAN list to special MSTI ID The range for the VLAN list is 1 4094 Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier MST Instance Setting Information MSTI VLAN List VLAN Count Priority Figure 4 6 13 MSTI Instance Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e MSTI e Status e VLAN List e VLAN Count e Priority Description Display the current MSTI entry Display the current MSTI status Display the current VLAN list Display the current VLAN count Display the current MSTI priority 155 MST Instance Status Information Name Information Value MSTI ID Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Last Topology Change Figure 4 6 14 MST Instance Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI ID Display the MSTI ID e Regional Root Bridge Display the current designated root bridge e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Root Port Display the current root port e Max Age Display the current max age e Forward Delay Display the current forward delay e Remaining Hops Display the current remaining hops e Last Topology Change Display the cur
175. ge includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN e MAC Address Display the current MAC address e IP Address Display the current IP Address e Type Display the current entry type e Lease Time Display the current lease time e Action Click Delete to delete IP source guard binding table status entry 264 4 9 10 Port Security This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four as described below The Limit Control module is one of a range of modules that utilizes a lower layer module the Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learned on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wid The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4 9 64 amp Figure 4 9 65 appear Port Security AT PortSelect Select Security Max L2Entry L2 Max L2Entry Action Apply Figure 4 9 64 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Security e Mac L2 Entry e Action Description Sele
176. ge provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screens in Figure 4 2 1 amp Figure 4 2 2 appear Edit POCI502 16CXP 2T 25 System Name System Location Edit Default Location System Contact Edit Default Contact MAC Address Fe 1A 16 23 01 IP Address 192 168 0 147 Subnet Mask 255 755 255 0 Galeway 192168 0 254 Loader Version 1 0 0 48161 Loader Date Jun 08 2015 14 03 43 Firmware Version Wi 56150703 Firmware Date Jul 03 2015 12 23 32 System Object 1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 26769 1 1551 System Up Time 0 days 19 hours 1 mins 31 secs PCBIHW Version Wi Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Name Display the current system name e System Location Display the current system location e System Contact Display the current system contact Buttons Edit MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Loader Version Loader Date Firmware Version Firmware Date System Object ID System Up Time PCN HW Version Click to edit parameter 4 2 2 IP Configurations The MAC address of this POC Managed Switch The IP address of this POC Managed Switch The subnet mask of this POC Managed Switch The gateway of this POC Managed Switch The loader version of this POC Managed Switch The
177. gged Tagged nae a a Ej y E oe hoe A A hm J T m ia 802 10 Trunking VLAN 2 VLAN 3 PC 4 Untagged ss SS SS SE EE_E PC 1 Untagged A F I Y ll O a ll ll eae AAA ee eee E E e O O O O O O O O A A O O O ID es es de e SE a oe i o l l l ll l M Setup steps Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VLAN Name VLAN Type 137 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 Port 7 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 1 Port VLAN Status oe fae i CCOO es Co PS e e VLAN ID 1 Port 1 6 Untagged Port 7 Excluded Portto VLAN Settings VLAN ID 1 v Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged area SR CEN ses Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged OOOO OO ses Hyera O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged OOOO ser Hybrid Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged es id VLAN ID 2 Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 amp 7 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded 138 Port to VLAN Settings vano 2 7 GEL Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged CC EE Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged Untagged GE3 Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded Tagged O Untagged GE1 GE2 Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged IC Hybrid O F
178. gged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch MM IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those 118 ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 5 1 Ingress Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag Untag Table M IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their
179. ght describes LACP_ Activity LACP_Timeout Aggregation Synchronization Collecting Distributing Defaulted and Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web will show 110 _ if the contents are true the Web shows A T Q S C D F and E for each content respectively 111 4 5 VLAN 4 5 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated VLAN Overview 1 F i i l
180. guration as a startup configuration The startup configuration file will be loaded automatically across a system reboot 1 Click Save gt Save Configurations to FLASH to login the Configuration Manager page SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH Save Configurations to FLASH Restore to Default 2 Select Source File Running Configuration and Destination File Startup Configuration save Configuration Running configuration Source File Startup configuration Backup configuration Startup configuration O Backup configuration Destination File Apply 3 Press the Apply button to save running configuration to start up configuration 50 4 2 System Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the POC Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items HM System Information The switch system information is provided here E IP Configurations Configure the switch managed IP information on this page IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page User Configuration Configure new user name and password on this page HM Time Settings Configure SNTP on this page M Log Management The switch log information is provided here E SNMP Management Configure SNMP on this page 4 2 1 System Information The System Info pa
181. gy automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detecting the modes and speeds when both devices are connected Both 10BASE T and 100BASE TX devices can connect with the port in either half or full duplex mode If attached device is 100BASE TX port will set to 10Mbps without auto negotiation 10Mbps 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10BASE T full duplex 100Mbps without auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100BASE TX full duplex 345 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve your issue If the POC Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the POC Managed Switch is set up according to instructions in this manual MW The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the POC Managed Switch Mi Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status MM Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the POC Managed Switch If the POC Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port MW Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the
182. he following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a name from MAC based ACL list 275 v ACL Table Figure 4 10 2 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Click Delete to delete ACL name entry 4 10 2 MAC based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you select The MAC based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 3 Figure 4 10 4 appear o Range 1 2147483647 1 is first processed Permit O Deny Shutdown Any O User Defined o Os for matching 1s for no matching MAC Based ACE i Any O User Defined o Os for matching 1s for no matching Range 07 o Range 0x0500 0xF FFF Add Figure 4 10 3 MAC based ACE Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 276 Buttons Object ACL Name Sepuence Action DA MAC DA MAC Value DA MAC Mask SA MAC SA MAC Value SA MAC Mask VLAN ID 802 1p 802 1p Value 802 1p Mask Ethertype Range 0x05DD OxFFFF Description Select ACL name from this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned E Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped E Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE E Any No DA MAC filter is specified
183. he power socket limitation the POC Managed Switch makes the installation of cameras or WLAN APs easier and more efficient PoE Power Budget list for POC Managed Switch Model Name PoE Budget POC2502 8CXP 2T 25 POC2502 16CXP 2T 28 000000000000000 EZ E FE1 FES FEG FET FES Eid FES FE16 GEI GE E FES FEI FEI FEM FEI FEM FEI y ifs Fee FES FEA SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH POC 2502 180 XP 2725 PoE Configuration PoE Configuration 190 Degrees C FPC 100 42 C 109 F nee be o y PoE Schedule PD Alo Chock mw fom of Profile 1 4 EIS aE ee NO Figure 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Status 329 4 15 1 Long Reach Power over Ethernet Powered Device Long Reach Power over Ethernet Extenders Enterprise can extend IP Ethernet transmission and inject power over an existing coaxial cable for distance up to 1000m 3280ft to PoE IP camera POE wireless AP and any 802 3af at complied powered device PD 36 watts max Approved IFS Long Reach PoE Extenders The following list of approved IFS Long Reach PoE extenders is correct at the time of publication Long Reach Ethernet Coaxial Extenders E POC252 1CX 1P 1 Port 10 100TX PoE PSE 1 Port Coax Long Reach PoE Extender It is recommended to use IFS Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extenders on the POC Managed Switch If you insert a coaxial extender that is not supported the POC Managed Switch may
184. hentication list from this drop down list Set the session timeout value Set the password retry count value Set the silent time value Click to disconnect Telnet communication 232 Telnet Information Information Name Telnet Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Information Value Disabled default default 10 Current Telnet Sessions Count Figure 4 9 21 Telnet Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Telnet Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Current Telnet Session Count 4 9 5 2 SSH Description Display the current Telnet service Display the current login authentication list Display the current enable authentication list Display the current session timeout Display the current password retry count Display the current silent time Display the current Telnet session count Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user m
185. i PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Untagged Tagged PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN The POC Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The POC Managed Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT VLAN has a VID 1 112 This section has the following items El Management VLAN Configures the management VLAN a Create VLAN Creates the VLAN group a Interface Settings Configures mode and PVID on the VLAN port E Port to VLAN Configures the VLAN membership E Port VLAN Membership Displays the VLAN membership a Protocol VLAN Group Configures the protocol VLAN group Setting a Protocol VLAN Port Configures the protocol VLAN port setting Setting a GVRP Setting Configures GVRP global setting E GVRP Port Setting Configurs GVRP port setting m GVRP VLAN Displays the GVRP VLAN database E GVRP Statistics Displays the GVRP port statistics 4 5 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast
186. i OVverlOaGiinG ES 312 A LR Sa USOS italia dad ao radio rior a 313 4 13 DION OSUNA 314 Aito Cable DAGNO SUGS smile os 315 A ca ec tes nn AE E ees 317 AAs SN WO SU rah ss gostei onal iene ss od A aera Sod 317 Ae ASAP VG PING OS Tieton Sous hae chesseconctuaelius a etwas Sener ta a a a Wace ames o 318 AA AGS ROUTO essai acer h oe a danctedea a caa oocanisceiatse adi a a aa a 319 ATA RMON fata seas crea acauasccescousssnedveaveuce a 320 SA e ise sea eevee cosas ta oec teeta 320 4142 RMON EVEN sete sis tapes ee loe de e e alr Eas 322 ATES AMON EVEN OG asics aie as 323 AAA AAMON AM ote dd e oat cece eee 324 AAAS RMON FISIO scents scarce setae 24sec a feta ache e a e teases ei Reaeeeedeseideptetealoh 327 414 0 AMONIO dE 328 4 15 POWer over Ethernet rroi a AONA rE 329 4 15 1 Long Reach Power over Ethernet Powered DevicCe cccooonccccccocccncoccononoccnncnnnnnononnconnnnnnonnncrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnennnnoos 330 SA Melli Ola lio srra S S we teres cesdusne dauaeeiu seed 331 4 15 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration iss eneen A e T a E A 331 AAA PIE SO A A e e a a o e a a o 334 4 15 5 POE Alive Check CAU as 337 AO Maltenance aaa a 339 4 16 RACIONES ia ON 339 4 6 2ReDOOR oO WIC soso 339 4 163 DACKUD IM AO Ai A A 340 4 164 Upgrade Manage A o 341 A en eee ete en ee ne te eC ee On eee en ee ee eee one ee meee eee 342 5 SWITGH OPERATION cocer a 343 E O ON 343 9 2 AAN A A A a a ei aan 343 5 3 FOFWarginiG Sc Pinning an Ennio 343 5 4 STOle
187. ices 113 M IEEE 802 10 Standard IEEE 802 10 tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging E The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header HM 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type
188. ier Priority Port ID Display the current indentifier Priority Port ID e External Path Cost Conf Oper Display the current external path cost conf oper e Internal Path Cost Conf Oper Display the current internal path cost oper e Designated Root Bridge Display the current designated root bridge e External Root Cost Display the current external root cost e Regional Root Bridge Display the current regional root bridge e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Internal Port Path Cost Display the current internal port path cost e Edge Port Conf Oper Display the current edge port conf oper e P2P MAC Conf Oper Display the current P2P MAC conf oper e Port Role Display the current prot role e Port State Display the current port state 4 6 6 MST Instance Configuration This page allows the user to configure MST Instance Configuration The MST Instance Setting Information and Status screens 154 in Figure 4 6 12 Figure 4 6 13 amp Figure 4 6 14 appear MST Instance Setting MSTI ID 1 Poe en ee ae eerie ey oe HAEL A l A J ist 1 A Bes 6 LF ja j a f F im t i LS L l Ff j L Figure 4 6 12 MST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e MSTI ID e VLAN List 1 4096 Priority Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Description Allow to assign MSTI ID The ran
189. igure 4 4 11 LACP Port Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 108 Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Priority Display the current LACP priority parameter e Timeout Display the current timeout parameter 4 4 6 LAG Status This page displays LAG status The LAG Status screens in Figure 4 4 12 8 Figure 4 4 13 appear LAG Status LAGS LAG4 Mot Present Mot Present Figure 4 4 12 LAG Status Page Screenshot ESF E EE m E ESA C The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Display the current trunk entry e Name Display the current LAG name e Type Display the current trunk type e Link State Display the current link state e Active Member Display the current active member e Standby Member Display the current standby member LACP Information on PavierSyold pukoy akoy sei mu recio Pale Jas Figure 4 4 13 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 109 Object Trunk Port PartnerSysld PnKey AtKey Sel Mux Receiv PrdTx AtState PnState Description Display the current trunk ID Display the current port number The system ID of link partner This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner Port key of partner This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner Port key of actor The key is
190. ill be configured for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled e When DHCP snooping is globally enabled and DHCP snooping is then disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table 243 The DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4 9 35 amp Figure 4 9 36 appear DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting VLAN LIST Apply Figure 4 9 35 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Status Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Figure 4 9 36 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e Status Display the current DHCP snooping status 244 4 9 7 4 Port Setting Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted Command Usage A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network An untrusted interface
191. imes e Priority Display the current priority e Dead Time Display the current dead time e Usage Type Display the current usage type e Modufy Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 4 9 3 TACACS Server This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 13 Figure 4 9 14 amp Figure 4 9 15 appear Use Default Parameters IP Version Version 6 Version 4 Ke ng 063 ASCI Alphanumeric Characters Used l Timeout for Reply sec Range 1 30 Default 5 Apply Figure 4 9 13 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 226 Object Description e Key String The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the TACACS server and the switch e Timeout for Reply Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 30 a TACACS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes New Tacacs Server Server Definition By IP address O By name Server Key Muse Default Server Timeout Muse Default 130 SECS Server Priority O 659350 Add Figure 4 9 14 New Radius Server Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Definition Set the server defin
192. in Figure 4 2 21 Figure 4 2 22 appear SNMP Global Setting i State Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 4 2 21 SNMP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Buttons Appl aail Click to apply changes SWAMP Informations SNMP Disabled Figure 4 2 22 SNMP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNMP Display the current SNMP status 69 4 2 7 3 SNMP View Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 View Table Setting screens in Figure 4 2 23 and Figure 4 2 24 appear View Table Setting ViewName subtree OID Subtree OID Mask Add Figure 4 2 23 SNMPv3 View Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 Subtree OID The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk e Subtree OID Mask The bitmask identifies which positions in the specified object identifier are to be regarded as wildcards for the purpose of pattern matching e View Type Indicates the view
193. ion Method Display the current authentication method e MAC Address Display the current MAC address 4 9 2 RADIUS Server This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 10 Figure 4 9 11 amp Figure 4 9 12 appears Use Default Parameters wersion 6 version 4 Range 1 10 Default 3 sec Range 1 30 Default 3 o min Range D 2000 Default D 0 63 ASCII Alphanumeric Characters Used Apply Figure 4 9 10 Use Default Parameters Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Retries Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a 223 RADIUS server before retransmitting the request e Timeout for Reply Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 30 a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured
194. is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled both globally and on a VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or firewall to trusted state Set all other ports outside the local network or firewall to untrusted state The DHCP Snooping Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 37 amp Figure 4 9 38 appear The page includes the following fields DHCP Snooping Port Un Trusted O Trusted O Enable Y Disable Apply Figure 4 9 37 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot Object e Port Type Chaddr Check Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Description Select port from this drop down list Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message Indicates that the Chaddr check function is enabled on selected port Chaddr Client hardware address 245 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Un Trusted disabled Figure 4 9 38 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Port The switch port number o
195. it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will be kept as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 Setup Steps 1 Create VLAN Group 2 and 3 Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type 2 Assign VLAN mode and PVID to each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 135 Port VLAN Status A ES CC EC OC VLAN ID 2 Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID GE3 Hybrid S Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged GE6 O Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged VLAN ID 3 Port 4 amp 5 Untagged Port 6 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings VAN J Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged GE1 i GE2 i i E5 i G Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged GE6 Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded Tagged O Untagged Ce 136 4 5 14 2 VLAN Trunking between Two 802 1Q Aware Switches In most cases they are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 5 21 appears eee eee es eee ee ee PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Tagged a ae ESE A Ee O E ee ee Se PC 5 PC 6 Unta
196. ition e Server IP Address of the TACACS server IP name e Server Port Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 e Server Key The key shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch e Server Timeout The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the server before it resends the request e Server Priority Set the server priority Buttons 22 Add Click to add Radius server setting TACACS Servers The page includes the following fields Object IP Address Port Key Timeout Retries Priority Modify Figure 4 9 15 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot Description Display the current IP address Display the current port Display the current key Display the current timeout Display the current retry times Display the current priority Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 228 4 9 4 AAA Authentication authorization and accounting AAA provides a framework for configuring access control on the POC Managed Switch The three security functions can be summarized as follows e Authentication Identifies users that request access to the network e Authorization Determines if users can access specific services e Accounting Provides reports auditing and billing for services that users have accessed on the network
197. join empty TX RX packets 132 Empty Rx Tx Leave Empty Rx Tx Join In Rx Tx Leave In Rx Tx LeaveAll Rx Tx GVRP Port Error Statistics Display the current empty TX RX packets Display the current leave empty TX RX packets Display the current join in TX RX packets Display the current leave in TX RX packets Display the current leaveall TX RX packets Clear Refresh The page includes the following fields Figure 4 5 19 GVRP Port Error Statistics Page Screenshot Object Buttons Clear Refresh Port Invaild Protocol ID Invalid Attribute Type Invalid Attribute Value Invalid Attribute Length Invalid Event Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current invalid protocol ID Display the current invalid attribute type Display the current invalid attribute value Display the current invalid attribute length Display the current invalid event Click to clear the GVRP Error Statistics Click to refresh the GVRP Error Statistics 133 4 5 14 VLAN setting example Separate VLANs 802 1Q VLAN Trunk 4 5 14 1 Two Separate 802 1Q VLANs The diagram shows how the POC Managed Switch handles Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLANs Each VLAN isolates network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 5 20 appears and Table 4 5 2 desc
198. kets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply 4 13 3 Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP ping packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Apply ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Ping Test Setting IP xoxo Or hostname 1 5 Default 4 rales 1 5 Default 1 Size in bytes 8 5120 Default 56 Ping Results Apply Figure 4 13 3 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Count Number of echo requests to send e Interval in sec Send interval for each ICMP packet e Size in bytes The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes e Ping Results Display the current ping result 317 Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address 4 13 4 IPv6 Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Apply 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes
199. lay the current expiry time Static Router Table e Pon SSSC S S S S S SsSC SSSSSSSSSS Figure 4 7 18 Static Router Table Page Screenshot 172 The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask Forbbiden Router Table o ma OOOCOCSC CS Figure 4 7 19 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 4 7 2 7 IGMP Forward All This page provides IGMP Forward All The Forward All screen in Figure 4 7 20 appears Forward All vno H Static Forbidden Y None Static Forbidden None Static Forbidden None LAG Static Forbidden None LAGE Static Forbidden Y None Apply Figure 4 7 20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot 173 The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign IGMP membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Membership Select IGMP membership for each interface Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the IGMP via MVR Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Interface is a member of the IGMP Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply
200. ld damage the module and the SFP module slot of the POC Managed Switch 2 2 4 Installing the Long Reach PoE Communication The sections describe how to insert a coaxial cable into a BNC female port You can plug in and out the coaxial cable to from any BNC female port port without having to power down the POC Managed Switch Approved IFS Long Reach PoE Extenders The following list of approved IFS Long Reach PoE extenders is correct at the time of publication Long Reach Ethernet Coaxial Extenders E POC252 1CX 1P_ 1 Port 10 100TX PoE PSE 1 Port Coax Long Reach PoE Extender It is recommended to use IFS Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extenders on the POC Managed Switch If you insert a coaxial extender that is not supported the POC Managed Switch may damage it 33 1 Before we connect POC Managed Switch to the other network device we have to make sure both sides of the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender transceiver are with the same media type 2 Check whether the coaxial cable type matches with the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender transceiver requirement gt Toconnect to POC Managed Switch please use the coaxial cable with 75 2 BNC plug with one side being the BNC plug connector type gt To connect to Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extenders please use the coaxial cable with one side being the 75Q BNC plug connector type Because there are various resistance values in the category of RG 59 U or RG 6 U ca
201. level of the error conditions for local log warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log info Informational level of the informational messages for local log debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log e Facility Local0 7 local user 0 7 Buttons Appl delata Click to apply changes Remote Logging Setting Status Figure 4 2 17 Remote Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Display the current remote syslog state e Server Info Display the current remote syslog server information e Severity Display the current remote syslog severity e Facility Display the current remote syslog facility e Action Delete Delete the remote server entry 4 2 6 4 Log Message The switch log view is provided here The Log View screens in Figure 4 2 18 Figure 4 2 19 amp Figure 4 2 20 appear Logging Filter Select severity Category buffered Select Levels Select Categories ll View Figure 4 2 18 Log Information Select Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 65 Object Description e Target The target of the log view entry The following target types are supported Buffered Target the buffered of the log view m File Target the file of the log view e Severity The severity of the log view entry The following severity typ
202. lf Duplex 15 Full Duplex 4 10 000 3 5 000 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 6 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 100 2 000 000 Full Duplex 95 1 999 999 90 1 000 000 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 90 000 Table 4 6 2 Recommended STP Path Costs 149 Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 90 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 6 3 Default STP Path Costs CIST Port Status LAGO Emnmaule mu ro Figure 4 6 7 STP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Admin Enable Display the current STP port mode status e External Cost Display the current external cost e Edge Port Display the current edge port status e BPDU Filter Display the current BPDU filter configuration e BPDU Guard Display the current BPDU guard configuration e P2P MAC Display the current P2P MAC status 150 4 6 4 CIST Instance Setting This Page allows you to configure CIST instance settings The CIST Instance Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 6 8 Figure 4 6 9 appear CIST Instance Setting Apply Figure 4 6 8 CIST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Priority Control
203. llows user to enable or disable the whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule Please note that if you want PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule to work at the same time please use this function and don t use Reboot Only function This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at an indicated time if administrator has this kind of requirement Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule Please note that if administrator enables this function PoE schedule will not set time to profile This function is just for PoE port to reset at an indicated time Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots This function is only for PoE reboot schedule Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots This function is only for PoE reboot schedule Click to add new rule Delete Check to delete the entry 336 4 15 5 PoE Alive Check Configuration The PoE Switch can be configured to monitor connected PD s status in real time via ping action Once the PD stops working and without response the PoE Switch is going to restart PoE port port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden PD Status PT PoE Camera Good gt gt gt gt gt Ping Request cc d enla Ping Echo o yl Check alive status for 3 times Restart PoE device if without response This page provides you with how to configure PD Alive Check The screen in Figure 4 16 5 appears
204. logging service operation Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 61 Logging Information Information Name Information Value Figure 4 2 13 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Display the current logging service status 4 2 6 2 Local Log The switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 14 amp Figure 4 2 15 appear Local Logging Setting Select Targets r Apply Figure 4 2 14 Local Log Target Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target The target of the local log entry The following target types are supported Buffered Target the buffer of the local log m File Target the file of the local log e Severity The severity of the local log entry The following severity types are supported E emerg Emergency level of the system unsable for local log alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log error Error level of the error conditions for local log warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log info Informational level of the informational messages for local log debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log 62 Buttons Appl PPly
205. lowing fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Display the current dynamic router ports e Expiry Time Sec Display the current expiry time Static Router Table vano as Figure 4 7 30 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask Forbbiden Router Table VAN POM Figure 4 7 31 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 181 Object Description e VLANID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 4 7 4 6 MLD Forward All This page provides MLD Forward All The Forward All screen in Figure 4 7 32 appears Forward All VIAN ID Port Membership ors Static Forbidden None LAGG oF eae reer ee ne LAG Static Forbidden None LAGS Static Forbidden None Apply Figure 4 7 32 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign MLD membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Membership Select MLD membership for each interface Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the MLD via MVR Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Interface is
206. ludes the following fields Object DMAC SMAC Land UDP Blat TCP Blat POD IPv6 Min Fragment Description Enable or disable DoS check mode by DMAC SMAC Enable or disable DoS check mode by land Enable or disable DoS check mode by UDP blat Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP blat Enable or disable DoS check mode by POD Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 min fragment 268 Buttons Apply ICMP Fragments IPv4 Ping Max Size IPv6 Ping Max Size Ping Max Size Setting Smurf Attack TCP Min Hdr Size TCP SYN SPORT lt 1024 Null Scan Attack X Mas Scan Attack TCP SYN FIN Attack TCP SYN RST Attack TCP Fragment Offset 1 Click to apply changes Enable or disable DoS check mode by ICMP fragment Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv4 ping max size Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 ping max size Set the max size for ping Enable or disable DoS check mode by smurf attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP min hdr size Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn sport lt 1024 Enable or disable DoS check mode by null scan attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by x mas scan attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn fin attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn rst attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP fragment offset 1 DoS Informations Information Name DMAC SMAC Land Attack TCP Blat at POD Ping of Death IPv6 Min Fragment
207. n the event of a port error is detected and the port action shuts down the port Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by BPDU guard Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by self loop Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by broadcast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unknown multicast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unicast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ACL Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by port security violation Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by DHCP rate limit Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ARP rate limit 94 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Error Disable Information Information Name Information Value Figure 4 3 14 Error Disabled Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Recovery Interval BPDU Guard Self Loop Broadcast Flood Unknown Multicast Flood Unicast Flood ACL Port Security Violation DHCP Rate Limit ARP Rate Limt Display the current recovery interval time Display the current BPDU guard status Display the current self loop status Display the current broadcst flood status Display the current unknown multic
208. name list v ACL Table Figure 4 10 10 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Delet Click ecis to delete ACL name entry 4 10 6 IPv6 based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The IPv6 based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 11 amp Figure 4 10 12 appear 285 IPv6 Based ACE o Range 1 2147483647 1 is first processed Permit Deny Shutdown Any lF Select from list tep y Any OuUser Defined Any OUser Defined OP Us for matching 15 for no matching ATTY Single o Range 0 65535 Rangejo ossos Range 0 65535 ANY Single Range O 65535 o Range O 65535 Range Range 0 65835 0 50 Range 0 65538 Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care Est set Unset Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care O Any ODSCP to match Range 0 63 OIP Precedence to match lo Range O 7 AD Select from list destination Protocol ID to matcho Range 0 258 Am User Defined o Range D 255 Add Figure 4 10 11 IP based ACE Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 286 Object e ACL Name e Sepuence e Action e Protocol e Source IP Address e Source IP Address Value e Source IP Pr
209. nd SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 1 to 300 Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 1 to 255 Click to add a new SNMPv3 host entry SNMPv3 Host Status The page includes the following fields Object Server Address Notify Type User Name UDP Port Time Out Retries Figure 4 2 34 SNMPv3 Host Status Page Screenshot Description Display the current server address Display the current notify type Display the current user name Display the current UDP port Display the current time out Display the current retry times e Action Delete Delete the SNMPv3 host entry 4 2 7 10 SNMP Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 Engine ID on this page The entry index key is Engine ID The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host The SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 35 amp Figure 4 2 36 appear Engine ID Settings Use Default Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 2 35 SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply
210. nding entry 4 11 MAC Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The POC Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the 291 frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 4 11 1 Static MAC Setting The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 1 Figure 4 11 2 appear Static MAC Setting Figure 4 11 1 Statics MAC Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN Select VLAN from this drop down list e Port Select port from this drop down list Buttons Add Click to add new static MAC address Static MAC Status
211. networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Q in Q VLAN Tunnel MAN Service Provider Domain Backbone 0 n 9 lone Core Switch Qn 9 Tiana a MAN Edge Switch A Ln VLAN Tunnel ww EE ee M EE ae ee eee 1000Base T UTP p _ _ _ I A 1000 Ease SX LX Fiber optic 119 The POC Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use
212. nfiguration Display the current auto configuration state e IPv6 In Use Address Display the current IPv6 in use address e IPv6 In Use Router Display the current in use gateway e IPv6 Static Address Display the current IPv6 static address e IPv6 Static Router Display the current IPv6 static gateway e DHCPv 6 Client Display the current DHCPv6 client status 55 4 2 4 User Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users and privilege type Currently the only way to login as another user on the Web server is to close and reopen the browser After the setup is completed please press the Apply button to take effect Please login Web interface with a new user name and password the screens in Figure 4 2 6 amp Figure 4 2 7 appear New User P SEA EA E ate Ds UA A Aria Tur Pal SSW REL Re Palos Or Je Tye 3 a a a Usar Name Password Type rivile Figure 4 2 6 Local User Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username The name identifying the user Maximum length 32 characters Maximum number of users 8 e Password Type The password type for the user e Password Enter the user s new password here Range 0 32 characters plain text case sensitive e Retype Password Please enter the user s new password here again to confirm e Privilege Type The privilege type for the user Options e Admin e User e Other Buttons Apply Click to apply changes
213. nges Properties Informations Unknown Multicast Action Forwarding Method For IPv4 Forwarding Method For IPvb Figure 4 7 2 Properties Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Unknown Multicast Action Display the current unknown multicast action status e Forward Method For IPv4 Display the current IPv4 multicast forward method e Forward Method For IPv6 Display the current IPv6 multicast forward method 161 4 7 2 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups tha
214. nk port Port VLAN Status Accept Frame Type Ingress Filtering Uplink TPID aen Teher 0x8100 ella Mesias 0x8100 nella Dealer 0x8100 Soo Liz 0 81 Enabled Disabled ALL 121 Figure 4 5 6 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Port Interface VLAN Mode PVID Accepted Frame Type Ingress Filtering Uplink TPID Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current interface VLAN mode Display the current PVID Display the current access frame type Display the current ingress filtering Display the current uplink mode Display the current TPID 122 4 5 6 Port to VLAN Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index This page allows you to add and delete port members of each VLAN The screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears Portto VLAN Settings Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged cy Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged wo Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged wo m a A E O Forbidden i 1 i a R fey Llata nnar Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged acre Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged LAGE Forbidden Excluded Tagged Y Untagged Apply Figure 4 5 7 Port to VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign VLAN membership e Port The switch port n
215. nstalled and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Notice This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003du Canada 2004 108 EC EMC Directive Hereby UTC Building amp Industrial Systems Inc declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2004 108 EC For contact information see www interlogix com or www utcfssecurityproducts eu TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION custodio iones todita 10 13 Packet Contenido 10 1 2 Product Descrip ssia era aaae aa aSa Eea EE aa AEs Eaa ES rania 11 13 Howto Use THIS Manua hurrian e aia iaar 16 LA Product ECU A A A A 16 15 Product Speciicatons cian iia 19 2 INSTALLATION cias 25 2 14 Hardware Description inn saves ans dscucanscedesasceesstecsasceussseusevedsoseeveascoctasaeeuvevssusesssuesect 25 AS PP a A A qataarnionates Gime 25 reaped Wierd et BB AAA AS a a 26 ZN WW INC MAAN oe AINE I gic pec sai ctarcactitn atrdanat cia ctae nals nic E O 28
216. nt are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 216 4 9 1 2 802 1X Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X authentication system The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Security gt 802 1X Access Control gt 802 1X Setting page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below The 802 1X Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 3 amp Figure 4 9 4 appear 802 1x Setting 802 1X Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 9 3 802 1X Setting Page Scre
217. ntry E Unset TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry NW Unset TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry E Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 282 Buttons Add e Type of Service e ICMP e ICMP Code Click to add ACE list FIN NW Set TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry E Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry E Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the type pf service for this ACE Any No specifc type of service is specified destination port status is don t care DSCP If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE you can enter a specific DSCP value A field for entering a DSCP value appears The allowed range is 0 to 63 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value
218. nts They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules Network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP Community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public 68 4 2 7 2 SNMP System Information Configure SNMP setting on this page The SNMP System global setting screens
219. ode a Auto Setup Auto negotiation Auto 10M Setup 10M Auto negotiation Auto 100M Setup 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Setup 1000M Auto negotiation Auto 10 100M Setup 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Setup 10M Force mode 100M Setup 100M Force mode 1000M Setup 1000M Force mode e Duplex Select any available link duplex for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode E Auto Setup Auto negotiation A Full Force sets Full Duplex mode E Half Force sets Half Duplex mode e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes D ti Enable Link s d Dupl Flow Ctrl Flow Ctrl UE 5tate Status f o Config Status cer Edit Enabled up Ato00M AFull Disabled Disabled Figure 4 3 2A Port Status Page Screenshot 83 The page includes the following fields Object Port Description Enable State Link Status Speed Duplex Flow Control Configuration
220. odules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The SSH Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 23 8 Figure 4 9 24 appear 233 SSH Settings Disabled e default default 0 65535 minutes 3 0 120 minutes o 0 65535 seconds Apply Disconnect Figure 4 9 23 SSH Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object SSH Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Buttons Appl mR Click to apply changes Disconnect SSH Information Description Disable or enable SSH service Select login authentication list from this drop down list Select enable authentication list from this drop down list Set the session timeout value Set the password retry count value Set the silent time value Click to disconnect Telnet communication Information Name formation Value SSH Service Disabled Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Current SSH Sessions Count 234 Figure 4 9 24 SSH Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SSH
221. of the history entry e Sample Port Select port from this drop down list e Bucket Requested Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 50 default value is 50 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds Owner Specify an owner for the history Buttons Appl oi Click to apply changes Figure 4 14 8 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 327 Object Description e Index Display the current index e Data Source Display the current data source e Bucket Requested Display the current bucket requested e Interval Display the current interval e Owner Display the current owner e Action Click Delete to delete RMON history entry 4 14 6 RMON History Log This page provides a detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 14 9 appears RMON History Table History Index Select History v No data avaliable Figure 4 14 9 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Select history index from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 328 4 15 Power over Ethernet The POC Managed Switch can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP camera system and AP group for the enterprise Without t
222. ogether to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed suplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group E Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation INT A Link Aggregation 4 Port Link Aggregation Up to 4 Gbps Figure 4 4 1 Link Aggregation 101 The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consec
223. oming frame in an internal buffer and does the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occur It is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability However the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves the overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using the conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet is stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduces the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate 343 No packet loss will occur 344 5 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have a built in Auto negotiation This technolo
224. on options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements E Workstations running Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 8 2008 MAC OS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platforms are compatible with TCP IP protocols a Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card Al Serial Port connect Terminal e The above PC with COM Port DB9 RS232 or USB to RS232 converter a Ethernet Port connection e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors E The above Workstation is installed with Web browser and JAVA runtime environment plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access POC Managed Switch 38 3 2 Management Access Overview The POC Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods E An administration console E Web browser interface E An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the POC Managed Switch software and are avallable for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Console Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet
225. one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are tran
226. oot Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and the switch s 32768 MAC configurable MAC address 142 except by setting priority below Priority Hello Time Maximum Age Timer Forward Delay Timer The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC A relative priority for each switch lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge The length of time between broadcasts of the hello message by the switch Measures the age of a received BPDU for a port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer The amount time spent by a port in the learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path O Auto D
227. orbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged B A Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged GE Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged O Untagged HA VLAN ID 3 Port 4 amp 5 Untagged Port 6 amp 7 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings vano wy cee Hybrio O Forbidden O Excluded Tagged O Untagged oO O OMe 139 4 6 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 6 1 Theory The Spanning Tree Protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions a STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D a RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w E MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link On
228. ormance om ee 77 6Mbps 200m 6 6 6 6 Distance The actual data rate and PoE output vary on the quality of the copper wire and environmental factors The performance result above is based on the testing via the RG 6 U coaxial cable TX POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S to POC252 1CX 1P RX POC252 1CX 1P to POC2502 8CXP 2T 25 Up to 3 POC extenders within 1km RG 6 U coaxial cable Multiple Nodes The actual extender nodes vary on the quality of the copper wire and environmental factors POC Compatibility a P 1 Port 10 100TX PoE PSE 1 Port Coax Long Reach PoE Console 1 x RS232 to RJ45 serial port 115200 8 N 1 Switch Architecture Store and Forward Switch Fabric 9 6Gbps non blocking Address Table 8K entries Shared Data Buffer 4 1 megabits IEEE 802 3x pause frame for full duplex Flow Control Back pressure for half duplex lt 5 sec System reboot gt 5 sec Factory default LED PWR SYS LNK PoE in Use 1000 LNK ACK Fan 1 Alert Fan 2 Alert Reset Button 20 Dimensions W x D x H Weight Power Requirements ESD Protection Power Consumption Enclosure PoE PWR Alert 440 x 300 x 44 5 mm 1U height 42820 AC 100 240V 50 60Hz auto sensing 6KV DC 270 watts 926 BTU 495 watts 1698 BTU Metal Layer 2 Functions Port Mirroring VLAN Link Aggregation Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Access Control List QoS Security Management Functions TX
229. ort name e Enable State Display the current port state e Link Status Display the current link status 4 3 3 Port Counters This page provides an overview of traffic and trunk statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 3 3 Figure 4 3 4 Figure 4 3 5 Figure 4 3 6 appear Port MIB Counters Settings San Olnterface O Etherlike ORMON Figure 4 3 3 Port MIB Counters Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 85 Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Mode Select port counters mode Option o All 6 Interface Ether link e RMON Interface Counters Counters Value Coumes o C Received Unst Packets OOO e Received Unknown Uneast Packets E Received Diecase Packets OSC A A CT A Fran Orina Une Pagar E A iOS Received Matias Pet E Received BoedcastPacketa E A COTE OdOSSSCSCS Figure 4 3 4 Interface Counters Page Screenshot Object Description e Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters e Received Unicast The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Packets e Received Unknown The number of packets received via the interface which is discarded because of Unicast Packets an unknown or unsupported protocol e Received Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though Packets no errors had been detected to prevent th
230. ory display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 14 1 RMON Statistics This page provides a detail of a specific RMON statistics entry RMON Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears Port GE1 RMON Statistics Port Clear CET e COLE CT A CT OC TT AN CI CI CET Figure 4 14 1 RMON Statistics Detail Page Screenshot 320 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Drop Events e Octets e Packets e Broadcast Packets e Multicast Packets e CRC Alignment Errors e Undersize Packets e Oversize Packets e Fragements e Jabbers e Collisions e 64 Bytes Frame e 65 127 Byte Frames e 128 255 Byte Frames e 256 511 Byte Frames e 512 1023 Byte Frames e 1024 1518 Byte Frames Buttons Clear Description Select port from this drop down list The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address The t
231. osed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some nodes on the network including MAC address port no etc This information comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 5 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port number and the other related information in the address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 5 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will look up the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at a different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from the address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet then this packet will be filtered thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 5 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the inc
232. otal number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1518 octets in length Click to clear the RMON statistics 321 4 14 2 RMON Event Configure RMON Event table on this page The RMON Event screens in Figure 4 14 2 amp Figure 4 14 3 appear RMON Event Select Index ee Community Description 0 127 Charactors Apply Figure 4 14 2 RMON Event Configuration Page Scr
233. ovide DNS lookup Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation Provide the subnet mask of this switch in dotted decimal notation Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation Click to apply changes IP Information Information Name Information Value DHCP State Disabled Static IP Address 192 168 1 1 c Static Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Static DNS Server 1 168 95 1 1 Static DNS Server 2 168 95 192 1 The page includes the following fields Object DHCP State IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Server 1 2 Figure 4 2 3 IP Information Page Screenshot Description Display the current DHCP state Display the current IP address Display the current subnet mask Display the current gateway Display the current DNS server 53 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration The IPv6 Configuration includes Auto Configuration IPv6 Address and Gateway The configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration Fill out the Auto Configuration IPv6 Address and Gateway for the device The screens in Figure 4 2 4 amp Figure 4 2 5 appear IPv6 Address Setting Auto Configuration ODisable O Enable DHCPv6 Client GS Disable O Enable Apply Figure 4 2 4 Pv6 Address Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Auto Configuration e IPv6 Address e Gateway
234. owing fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e DSCP Select DSCP value from this drop down list Buttons Apply PPY _ Click to apply changes 197 DSCP mapping mn E E Lo bh O mn m Pu Ez O Figure 4 8 9 DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields m N p W aes of se U gt ac Jesc I DUON e DSCP Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to DSCP Display the current mapping to DSCP 198 4 8 2 6 IP Precedence Mapping The IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 10 8 Figure 4 8 11 appear IP Precedence to Queue Mapping Ga bg Y a k 2 bi Figure 4 8 10 IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e IP Precedence Select IP Precedence value from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes IP Precedence mapping IP Prece ap AMS A CO A Ss SSS AAA 199 Mapping to IP Precedence Figure 4 8 11 IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Precedence Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Q
235. p down list Buttons Add Click to add IGMP router port entry MLD Static Groups Figure 4 7 25 MLD Static Groups Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID Group IPv6 Address Display the current group IPv6 address e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Modify Edit Click to edit parameter 178 4 7 4 3 MLD Group Table This page provides MLD Group Table The MLD Group Table screen in Figure 4 7 26 appears MLD Group Table Figure 4 7 26 MLD Group Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Display the current VID e Group IP Address Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Port Display the current member port e Type Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic depending on selected options e Life Sec Display the current life 4 7 4 4 MLD Router Setting Depending on your network connections MLD snooping may not always be able to locate the MLD querier Therefore if the MLD querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your POC Managed Switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the POC Manage
236. p to 1 000m 3 280ft over coaxial cable to the POC Extender and another 100m over Ethernet cable to remote PoE IP camera PoE wireless AP or access control systems complied with 802 3af at PoE Power over Coaxial 802 3at PoE PoE POC2502 8CXP 2T 25 As POC252 1CX 1P ip camera Coaxial Up to ikm Typical POC to IP Camera Configuration 11 Centralized Power Management IFS POC2502 Managed Switch eliminates the need for an additional remote site power while allowing a single power source to provide power to both POC extenders and the PoE powered devices at long range The Long Reach PoE capabilities provided help to reduce installation time and deployment costs for network devices as a result of freeing from restrictions of power outlet locations Daisy chaining Multiple Nodes IFS Long Reach PoE solution can easily build a power system for centrally controlled IP cameras in a high availability network infrastructure lt gives users the flexibility to expand small area network with BNC T connector for sharing four nodes per port when needed Built in Unique PoE Functions for Powered Devices Management As a managed PoE switch for surveillance wireless and VolP networks the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch particularly features the following special PoE Management functions to accomplish a highly efficient Long Reach network PD Alive Check Scheduled Power Recycling PoE Schedule PoE Usage Monitoring Intelligen
237. play the current name e Type Display the current type e Link State Display the link state 104 e Active Member e Standby Member e Modify 4 4 3 LAG Port Setting Display the active member Display the standby member Click Edit to modify LAG configuraiton This page allows setting configuration for each LAG The LAG Port Setting screens in Figure 4 4 6 amp Figure 4 4 7 appear LAG Port settings LAG Select Enabled Flow Control Select LAGs OEnabled O Disabled O Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 4 6 LAG Port Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e LAG Selet e Enable e Speed e Flow Control Description Select LAG number from this drop down list Indicates the LAG state operation Possible states are Enabled Start up the LAG manually Disabled Shut down the LAG manually Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode WE Auto Set up Auto negotiation Auto 10M Set up 10M Auto negotiation Auto 100M Set up 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Set up 1000M Auto negotiation Auto 10 100M Set up 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Set up 10M Force mode 100M Set up 100M Force mode E 1000M Set up 1000M Force mode When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected
238. port allows traffic of multiple VLANs M Access indicates the port belongs to one VLAN only E Hybrid means the port allows the traffic of multi VLANs to pass in tag or untag mode NW Tunnel configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling for a downlink port to another device within the customer network e PVID Allows you to assign PVID to selected port The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must be the same as the VLAN ID that the port belongs to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped 120 e Accepted Type e Ingress Filtering e Uplink e TPID Buttons Apply Click to apply changes The range for the PVID is 1 4094 Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded Options E All E Tag Only NW Untag Only By default the field is set to All e f ingress filtering is enabled checkbox is checked frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded e f ingress filtering is disabled frames classified to a VLAN that the port is nota member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine However the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of Enable disable uplink function in trunk port Configure the type TPID of the protocol of switch tru
239. pped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame HM Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Mi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 5 3 Management VLAN Configure Management VLAN on this page The screens in Figure 4 5 1 amp Figure 4 5 2 appear Management VLAN Setting Apply Figure 4 5 1 Management VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 116 Object Description e Management VLAN Provide the managed V
240. r disable to check all zero IP addresses 25 Apply Click to apply changes DAI Port Setting Pot Type SrcMac Chk Dst MacChk IP Chk Pa GEI dieses teased steele discos GE Tea ieee iseble echos GE3 Hesblea E e e O aa a E disabled LAGE pea ed E E disabled LAG dfealn ied saltas e TE LAGS read ella E e Figure 4 9 55 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Type Display the current port type e Src Mac Chk Display the current Src Mac Chk status e Dst Mac Chk Display the current Dst Mac Chk status e IP Chk Display the current IP Chk status e IP Allow Zero Display the current IP allow zero status 208 4 9 8 4 Statistics Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode DAI Port Setting screen in Figure 4 9 56 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Statistics Clear Refresh Dest MAC Failures SIP Validation Failures DIP Validation Failures IP MAC Mismatch Failures Figure 4 9 56 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Forwarded Display the current forwarded Source MAC Failures Display the current source MAC failures e Dest MAC Failures Display the current source MAC failures SIP Validation Failures Display the current SIP Validation failures e DIP Validation
241. r each port PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields The ports are shut down when total reserved power exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver a gA ZA In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more available power Mote 4 15 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration setting as screen in Figure 4 16 1 appears PoE Configuration 80 Degrees C 405C 104 Figure 4 16 1 PoE Configuration Screenshot 331 The page includes the following fields Object Description e System PoE Admin Allows user to enable or disable PoE function It will cause all of PoE ports to Mode supply or not to supply power e PoE Management There are six modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and Mode when to shut down ports E Consumption mode The system offers PoE power according to PD real power consumption E Allocation mode Users allow to assign how much PoE power to each port and the system will reserve PoE power to PD e Temperature Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value If the system Threshold temperature is overly high the system will lower the total POE power budget automatically e PoE Temperature Display the PoE Chip Temperature This section displays the PoE Power Usage of Current Power Consumption as Figure 4 16 2 shows Figure 4 16 2 Current Power
242. r limit value 333 4 15 4 PoE Schedule This page allows the user to define PoE schedule and scheduled power recycling PoE Schedule Besides being used as an IP Surveillance the Managed PoE switch is certainly applicable to construct any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to the environmental protection on the Earth the Managed PoE switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power The PoE schedule function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMB or Enterprise save power and money z A 1 Sl E 5 T BAN FA SPM Power Power Power Pu a er Prr Firre OH Off Om on Ora Dn Power Cn 6 Watts amp Watts 12 Watts 12 Watt 6 Watts 6 Watts 12 Watts 12 Watts e Save 24 watts hr during off business hours Total consumption of 36 watts hr Total Saved 10800 Watts month Scheduled Power Recycling The Managed PoE switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot at a specified time each week Therefore it will reduce the chance of IP camera crash resulting from buffer overflow Automatically Reboot Automatically Reboot Every Monday 03 00 Every Friday 23 00 ON esla 3MTWTFS _ OFF Y ON SMTWTFS PoE PoE AL CEC gt gt gt gt gt gt j OM
243. r row apply to the frame type listed here m broadcast NW unknown unicast m unknown multicast e Rate kbps pps Configure the rate for the storm control The default value is 10 000 Buttons 273 Appl PPly Click to apply changes Storm Control Information Port ponsa Broadcast tops unawa manicas opg ten Unicas ps Jen T 7 oy 000 or 000 En UT Figure 4 9 72 Storm Control Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Port State Display the current port state e Broadcast Kbps pps Display the current broadcast storm control rate e Unknown Multicast Display the current unknown multicast storm control rate Kbps pps e Unknown Unicast Display the current unknown unicast storm control rate Kbps pps e Action Display the current action 2 4 4 10 ACL ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that
244. r use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field Known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0
245. ration Configures port configuration settings m POC Port Configuration Configures POC port configuration settings E Port Counters Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics a Bandwidth Utilization Displays current bandwidth utilization a Port Mirroring Sets the source and target ports for mirroring a Jumbo Frame Sets the jumbo frame on the switch E Port Error Disable Configures port error disable settings Configuration E Port Error Disabled Status Disables port error status E Protected Ports Configures protected ports settings A EEE Configures EEE settings E SFP Module Information Displays SFP module information 4 3 1 Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations and status Ports can also be configured here The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 1A 8 Figure 4 3 2A appear Port settings Port Select Flow Control O Enabled Disabled O Enabled Disabled Fiber Ports Ante 1000M w Apply Figure 4 3 1A Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Enabled Indicates the port state operation Possible states are Enabled Start up the port manually 82 Disabled Shut down the port manually e Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the m
246. re 4 9 32 appear Access Profile active O Deactive Apply Figure 4 9 31 Access Profile Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Select access profile from this drop down list Buttons 239 Apply Click to apply changes Access Profiles Table Figure 4 9 32 Access Profile Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e Access Profile Display the current access profile e Delete Delete Click to delete access profile entry 240 4 9 7 DHCP Snooping 4 9 7 1 DHCP Snooping Overview The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port DHCP Snooping Overview VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address 1 192 168 0 1 00 30 4F 11 22 33 s 2 192 168 0 2 00 11 22 55 AA BB SS ae ee eee ee DHCP Client gt DHCP Trust Port MAC a 00 30 4F 11 22 33 i DHCP Client q 2 A MAC 00 11 22 55 AA BB A Un Trust Port DHCP Client 3 MAC 00 50 77 66 55 44 Command Usage Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter D
247. ready exists That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are a None None authentication protocol A MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol E SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For both MD5 and SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 16 Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are E None None privacy protocol 19 a DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Encryption Key A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 16 Buttons Add Click to add a new user entry UserName Group Privilege Mode Authentication Protocol Encryption Protocol Access Right Action Figure 4 2 30 SNMPv3 Users Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name Display the current user name e Group Display the current group e Privilege Mode Display the current privilege mode e Authentication Protocol Display the current authentication proto
248. reduce noise and maintain the temperature of the PoE switch for optimal power output capability The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch is able to operate reliably stably and quietly in any environment without affecting its performance IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack Supporting both IPv6 and IPv4 protocols the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch the SMBs to step in the IPv6 era with the lowest investment as its network facilities need not be replaced or overhauled if the IPv6 FTTx edge network is set up Robust Layer 2 Features The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic port link aggregation 802 1Q VLAN and Q in Q VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Loop and BPDU Guard IGMP Snooping and MLD Snooping Via the link aggregation the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch allows the operation of a high speed trunk to combine with multiple ports such as an 8Gbps fat pipe and supports fail over as well Also the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is the Layer 2 Protocol included to help discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain L2 L4 w 12 14 Managed Switch Managed Switch Efficient Traffic Control The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch is loaded with robust QoS features and powerful traffic management to enhance services to business class data voice and video solutions The functionality includes broadcast multicast storm control per port bandwidth control IP DS
249. reens in Figure 4 12 5 amp Figure 4 12 6 appear VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection Port Select VLAN Select Apply Figure 4 12 5 VLAN Name TLV Selection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Select Select VLAN from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Selected VLAN Figure 4 12 6 LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Selected VLAN Display the current selected VLAN 302 4 12 4 LLDP Local Device Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen to display information about the switch such as its MAC address chassis ID management IP address and port information The Local Device Summary and Port Status screens in Figure 4 12 7 Figure 4 12 8 appear Local Device Summary Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address Chassis ID OU sU 4F AF FF 31 Figure 4 12 7 Local Device Summary Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Chassis ID Subtype Display the current chassis ID subtype e Chassis ID Display the current chassis ID e System Name Display the current system name e System Description Display the current system description e Capabilities Supported Display the current capabilities supported e Capabilities Enabled
250. reenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 630 seconds Default 300 seconds Buttons Appl alaki Click to apply changes 294 Dynamic Address Status Information Name Information Value Figure 4 11 6 Dynamic Addresses Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time Display the current aging time 4 11 4 Dynamic Learned Dynamic MAC Table Dynamic Learned MAC Table is shown on this page The MAC Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The Dynamic Learned screens in Figure 4 11 6 amp Figure 4 11 7 appear Port GET yt CIVLAN MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 View Clear Figure 4 11 6 Dynamic Learned Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Select VLAN from this drop down list e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface Buttons View Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields 295 Clear Flushes all dynamic entries MAC Address Information a macas TO ie O 40 61 66 04 18 69 default 1 GE1 Add to Static MAC table Total Entries 1 Figure 4 11 7 MAC Address Information Page Screenshot Object Description e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e VLAN The VLAN
251. related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit as reflected by the page header The MLD Snooping Setting Information and Table screens in Figure 4 7 21 Figure 4 7 22 amp Figure 4 7 23 appear MLD Snooping MLD Apply Figure 4 7 21 MLD Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MLD Snooping Status Enable or disable the MLD snooping The default value is Disabled e MLD Snooping Version Sets the MLD Snooping operation version Possible versions are v1 Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 1 v2 Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 2 e MLD Snooping Report Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast capable routers When you Suppression disable report suppression all MLD reports are sent as is to multicast capable routers The default is enabled Buttons Apply PP Y Click to apply changes MLD Snooping Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 7 22 MLD Snooping information Page Screenshot 176 The page includes the following fields Object MLD Snooping Status MLD Snooping Version MLD Snooping Report Suppression Description Display the current MLD snooping status Display the current MLD snooping version Display the current MLD snooping report suppression MLD Snooping Table Query Query Query Max Robustness Interval sec Respon
252. rent last topology change 156 4 6 7 MST Port Setting This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are global The MSTI Ports Setting screens in Figure 4 6 15 amp Figure 4 6 16 appear MST Port Setting MST ID Port Select Priority pi es Apply Figure 4 6 15 MST Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e MSTID e Port Select e Priority e Internal Path Cost 0 Auto Buttons Description Enter the special MST ID to configure path cost and priority Select port number from this drop down list Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding po
253. ribe a path the IP data packets traveled to reach the destination The Trace Route Setting screen in Figure 4 13 5 appears Trace Route Setting IP Address 132 168 1100 Xx xx or hostname Max Hop 30 2 265 Default 30 Trace Route Results Apply Figure 4 13 5 Trace Route Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Max Hop The maximum gateway number allowed by traceroute function e Trace Route Results Display the current trace route result Buttons Appl Piu Click to transmit ICMPv6 packets 319 4 14 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records Event A list of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and Hist
254. ribes the port configuration of the POC Managed Switches VLAN Overview i 1 i PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Untagged Tagged PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged VLAN 2 ha se n VLAN 3 EE A A eee ee eee ee dl E E EE SE EES HFS SESE SSS AAA ie L E E E gt PP AR de de ES E Figure 4 5 20 Two Separate VLAN Diagrams Table 4 5 2 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follows El Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmits an untagged packet enters Port 1 the POC Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will receive the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 134 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 receive no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will be kept as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 m Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 3 transmits a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 entering Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will receive the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 2 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmits an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will receive the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5
255. ription e STP Display the current STP state e BPDU Forward Display the current BPDU forward mode e Cost Method Display the current cost method e Force Version Display the current force version e Configuration Name Display the current configuration name e Configuration Revision Display the current configuration revision 4 6 3 STP Port Setting This page allows you to configure per port STP settings The STP Port Setting screens in Figure 4 6 6 amp Figure 4 6 7 appear STP Port Setting Port Select E rel Edge Port BPDU Filter BPDU Guard P2P MAC Migrate Apply Figure 4 6 6 STP Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e External Cost 0 Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost Auto as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Edge Port Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e BPDU Filter Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive
256. rity model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are El v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 El v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c a V3 Reserved for SNMPv3 or User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E Noauth None authentication and none privacy security levels are assigned to the group E auth Authentication and none privacy El priv Authentication and privacy Note The Security Level applies to SNNPv3 only e Read View Name Read view name is the name of the view in which you can only view the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Write View Name Write view name is the name of the view in which you enter data and configure the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Notify View Name Notify view name is the name of the view in which you specify a notify inform or trap 12 Buttons Add Click to add a new access entry Delete Check to delete the entry Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Action Figure 4 2 26 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name Display the current SNMP access group name e Security Model Display the current security model e Security Level Display the current security level e Read View Name Display the current read view name e Write View Nam
257. rks by setting two sub options NW Circuit ID option 1 Remote ID option 2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 44 amp Figure 4 9 45 appear Option82 Global Setting Remote ID Default OUser Define Po Apply Figure 4 9 44 Option 82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e State Set the option 2 remote ID option content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets NW Default means the default VLAN MAC format NW User Define means the remote id content of option 82 specified by users 201 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Options Global Setting Information Name Information Value Options Remote
258. rmation through the network has got its unique MAC address VLAN will trace the address belongs to specified MAC By This means VLAN allows the voice equipment always belong to Voice VLAN when relocated physically The greatest advantage of the VLAN is the equipment can be automatically placed into Voice VLAN according to its voice traffic which will be transmitted at specified priority Meanwhile when voice equipment is physically relocated it still belongs to the Voice VLAN without any further configuration modification which is because it is based on voice equipment other than switch port The Voice VLAN feature enables the voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic It is recommended there are two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI Note 4 8 5 2 Properties The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic It is recommended that there are two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble The
259. roadcast The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted Packets and addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Alone Enos IN esem Oooo p ET IN Me Ce Od C ANN CA CI Frame To Loge ETE Convalin Unknow pedes CTO A ETT Figure 4 3 5 Ethernet link Counters Page Screenshot Object Description e Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets e FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error e Single Collision The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited Frames by exactly one collision 87 Multiple Collision Frames Deferred Transmissions Late Collision Excessive Collision Frame Too Long Symbol Errors Control In Unknown Opcodes In Pause Frames Out Pause Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fail
260. rofile name 1 32 charaters e Priority 1 65535 Set priority The allowed value is from 1 to 65535 e Management Method Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPs telnet SSH SNMP AII interface that the host IP address matched the entry e Action An IP address can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Default Permit rules Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny e Port Select port from this drop down list e P Source Indicates the IP address for the access management entry Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Access Profile Name Priority Management Method Action Port Source IPV4 Source IPV4 Mask Source IPV6 Source IPV6 Prefix Figure 4 9 30 Profile Rule Table Page Screenshot 238 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Name Display the current access profile name e Priority Display the current priority e Management Method Display the current management method e Action Display the current action e Port Display the current port list e Source IPv4 Display the current source IPv4 address e Source IPv4 Mask Display the current source IPv4 mask e Source IPv6 Display the current source IPv6 address e Source IPv6 Prefix Display the current source IPv6 prefix e Modify Click Edit to edit profile rule parameter Click Delete to delete profile rule entry 4 9 6 2 Access Rules The access profile screens in Figure 4 9 31 amp Figu
261. rt The switch port number of the logical port e Trust Mode Display the current trust type 4 8 4 Rate Limit Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page 4 8 4 1 Ingress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 16 amp Figure 4 8 17 appear 202 Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings nds le dba mm Rate Kbps Port State Select Ports pisable O Enable sd 010000000 musta multiple of 16 Apply Figure 4 8 16 Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes v Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Ingress RateLimit Kbps or nW UU LAG off LAGS off Figure 4 8 17 Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Ingress Rate Limit Kbps Display the current ingress rate limit 203 4 8 4 2 Egress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the egress bandwidth preamble
262. rts in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 157 Appl aie Click to apply changes MST Port Status Indentifier Priority Port Figure 4 6 16 MST Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI ID Display the current MSTI ID e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Indentifier Priority Display the current indentifier priority port 1D Port 1D e Internal Path Cost Display the current internal path cost configuration operation Conf Oper e Regional Root Bridge Display the current regional root bridget e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Internal Path Cost Display the current internal path cost e Port Role Display the current port role e Port State Display the current port state 158 4 6 8 STP Statistics This page displays STP statistics The STP statistics screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears Configuration BDPU MSTP BDPU Configuration BDPUs TCN BDPUs MSTP BDPU a loo A a O A ee po po pp Je je The page includes the following fields Object Port Configuration BPDUs Received TCN BPDUs Received MSTP BPDUs Received Configuration BPDUs Transmitted TCN BPDUs Transmitted MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Figure 4 6 17 STP Statistics Page Screenshot Description The switch port number of the logical
263. s The MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame E IP MAC Address The IP and MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame Buttons Appl aail Click to apply changes LAG Information Figure 4 4 3 LAG Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Algorithm Display the current load balance algorithn 103 4 4 2 LAG Managment This page is used to configure the LAG management The LAG Management screens in Figure 4 4 4 amp Figure 4 4 5 appear LAG Management ti m UN Apply Figure 4 4 4 LAG Management Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Select LAG number from this drop down list e Name Indicates each LAG name e Type Indicates the trunk type Static Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them e Ports Select port number from this drop down list to establish Link Aggregation LAG Management Information met Not resent O wit ee ee a ee a a en a lt gt PA A bam L Figure 4 4 5 LAG Management Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG The LAG for the settings contained in the same row e Name Dis
264. s due to excessive collisions This counter does not increase when the interface is operating in full duplex mode A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size The number of received and transmitted symbol errors The number of received control unknown opcodes The number of received pause frames The number of transmitted pause frames RMON Counters Counters Value GoumesValwe o CET e CO TT CN r CE e C TT CT o CO aserne OOO Oooo o menr ooo o e EO SS dSSSOSOSOSOSSSCSCSCSCSCSCSCS C ERE ooo o OO C SSOSCS dSSSOSCSCSSSCSCSCS Figure 4 3 6 RMON Counters Page Screenshot Object Description e Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of 88 Octets Packets Broadcast Packets Multicast Packets CRC Alignment Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Fragments Jabbers Collisions 64 Bytes Frames 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames resources The total number of octets received and transmitted on the interface including framing characters The total number of packets received and transmitted on the interface The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets The total number of good frames received that were directed to this
265. s the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Max Hops This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 e Tx Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded 151 Buttons Apply Hello Time transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second The time that controls the switch to send out the BPDU packet to check STP current status Enter a value between 1 through 10 Click to appl
266. se CIA VLAN oe Snooping peration mr Router Leam Ports Auto Last Member ri cold Immediate Query count peral Leave HEEE PUREZA ro disabled The page includes the following fields Object Entry No VLAN ID MLD Snooping Operation Status Router Ports Auto Learn Query Robustness Query Interval sec Query Max Response Interval sec Last Member Query conut Last Member Query Interval sec Immediate Leave Modify Figure 4 7 23 MLD Snooping Table Page Screenshot Description Display the current entry number Display the current VLAN ID Display the current MLD snooping operation status Display the current router ports auto learning Display the current query robustness Display the current query interval Display the current query max response interval Display the current last member query count Display the current last member query interval Display the current immediate leave Edit Click to edit parameter 177 4 7 4 2 MLD Static Group The MLD Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4 7 24 8 Figure 4 7 25 appear Add Mid Static Group VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Ports Add Figure 4 7 24 Add MLD Static Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Group IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Ports Select port number from this dro
267. sending or receiving data over that port Lights To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps Orange Lights When LNK ACT LED lights up it indicates that the port is operating at 10 100Mbps Off When LNK ACT LED is Off it indicates that the port is linkdown 1000BASE SX LX SFP interfaces GE3 to GE4 Color Function _ To indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps Orange Lights When LNK ACT LED lights up it indicates that the port is operating at 10 100Mbps Off When LNK ACT LED is Off it indicates that the port is linkdown 27 POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S LED Indication Site POC2502 16CXP 2T 28 16 port Pow ALK 1 PoE In Use o lt Console 2 J gt N N SIN y S te RES 115200 N 8 1 PO lt Figure 2 1 2B POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S LED Panel 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the POC Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 1 3 shows the rear panel of these POC Managed Switches Rear Panel Figure 2 1 3 Rear Panel of POC2502 8CXP 2T 2S POC2502 16CXP 2T 2S Mi AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the POC Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the r
268. separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 307 e VLAN ID e Tag e L2 Priority e DSCP Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services App Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling fo
269. service providers to set up an IP infrastructure in a remote location where 802 3af at PoE compliant powered devices can receive both data and power via IFS switches and IFS POC2502 extenders and injectors over a long distance but not limited to the normal 100 meters Intelligent POC Switch on Coaxial based Network IFS POC2502 Managed Switch a brand new Multi channel Power Over Coax Switch features an extended Ethernet and PoE networking of up to 1 000 meters over the existing coaxial cables going to multiple PoE IP cameras It provides IPv6 IPv4 dual stack management and built in L2 L4 Gigabit Switching engine along with multi BNC ports with Long Reach PoE Injector function 2 Gigabit copper ports and 2 extra 100 1000BASE X SFP fiber slots As an advanced PoE switch the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch features intelligent PoE functions to improve the availability of critical applications It provides a quick safe and cost effective PoE network solution to upgrading the existing coaxial cable infrastructure from the analog system to the HD IP surveillance system Multi channel Long Reach Power over Ethernet To support the enterprises in easily building a multi channel and centrally controlled Long Reach PoE system the POC2502 works with the Long Reach PoE Extenders POC252 1CX 1P via its BNC ports being the Long Reach PoE injectors for all connected POC Extenders Each of the BNC port features long range data and power transmission for distance u
270. smitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Mi Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default 115 MM Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stri
271. stration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the POC Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight RS232 to RJ45 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are 115200 bps COM1 Properties 8 data bits Port Settings a a E No parity NW 1 stop bit Bits per second Mn Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Figure 3 1 2 Terminal Parameter Settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port 40 regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 3 4 Web Management The POC Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the POC Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the POC Managed Switch s Web interfac
272. t ACL Name Sepuence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Source Port Range Destiantion Port Range Flag Set DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type ICMP Code Modify 4 10 5 IPv6 based ACL Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current protocol Display the current source IP address Display the current source IP address wildcard mask Display the current destination IP address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask Display the current source port range Display the current destination port range Display the current flag set Display the current DSCP Display the current IP precedence Display the current ICMP Type Display the current ICMP code Click Edit to edit IPv4 based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete IPv4 based ACL entry This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations IPv6 based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 9 amp Figure 4 10 10 284 appear IPv6 Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 9 IPv6 based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a name from IPv6 based ACL list Buttons Add Click to add ACL
273. t With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 3 8 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or Source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 9 amp Figure 4 3 10 appear 91 Mirror Setting select Session Apply Figure 4 3 9 Port Mirroring Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Session ID Monitor Session State Destination Port Allow ingress Sniffer TX Ports Sniffer RX Ports Description Set the port mirror session ID Possible ID are 1 to 4 Enable or disable the port mirroring function Select the port to mirror destination port Frames from ports that have either source RX or destination TX mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Frames transmitted from these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Frames received at these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Mirror Status Figure 4 3 10 Mirroring Status Page Screenshot 92 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Session ID Display the session ID e Destination Port This is the mirroring port entry e
274. t Powered Device Alive Check The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch can be configured to monitor connected PD Powered Device status in real time via ping action Once the PD stops working and responding the IFS POC2502 Managed Switch will resume the PoE port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the network reliability through the PoE port resetting the PD s power source and reducing administrator management burden PD Status PT PoE Camera No Response Good gt gt gt a gt A e Ping Request c gt A s Lo lt lt ea Es Ping Request m Ping Echo Check alive status for 3 times Alarm Notification PD Alive i PoE e DI ID Ty on on 4 Restart PoE device if without response 12 Scheduled Power Recycling The IFS POC2502 Managed Switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless access points via the POC252 1CX 1P to reboot at a specific time each week Therefore it will reduce the chance of IP camera or wireless AP crash resulting from buffer overflow Automatically Reboot Automatically Reboot Every Monday 03 00 Every Friday 23 00 ON ee MTTF S OFF ON 5M6TWTFASA MER AA ME PoE PoE a N w 7 H CLL Dpp M 4 J Y E a ON OFF OM OFF ON 4 y L F Sea Allows scheduled power recycling PoE Schedule for Energy Saving Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to environmental protection the IFS POC2502 Manag
275. t Select port from this drop down list e Location Coordinate A string identifying the Location Coordinate that this entry should belong to e Location Civic A string identifying the Location Civic Address that this entry should belong to Address e Location ESC ELIN A string identifying the Location ESC ELIN that this entry should belong to Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LLDP MED Port Location Table Figure 4 12 15 LLDP MED Port Location Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 311 Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Coordinate Display the current coordinate e Civic Address Display the current civic address e ESC ELIN Display the current ESC ELIN 4 12 8 LLDP Overloading The LLDP Port Overloading screen in Figure 4 12 16 appears LLDP Port Overloading Table S Transmitted 10 Transmitted 10 Trans mitted 2 CES 130 Overloading 2 a 1 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 10 Transmitted 10 Transmitted 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 2 Not 2 t S Transmitted 10 Transmitte d S Transmitted co co co 5 EN w w g uN wo w 3 gt om oO a a Gi No GE 1440 Overloading 1 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 22 Transmitted 9 Transmitted 10 Transmitted co D 3 a 3 gt D i Not i GE1 e 1440 ANE 1 Transmitted 9 Transmi
276. t from this drop down list Set default or user define Configure the rate limit for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 1 to 300 Click to apply changes DHCP Rate Limit Config Port Name GEI GEZ 54 Rate Limit pps Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Figure 4 9 43 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Rate Limit pps Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current rate limit 250 4 9 7 8 Option 82 Global Setting DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to DHCP servers Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients It is also an effective tool in preventing malicious network attacks from attached clients on DHCP services such as IP Spoofing Client Identifier Spoofing MAC Address Spoofing and Address Exhaustion The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option wo
277. t have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network d Give me multicast 7 Multicast X Receiver Multicast Switch Transmitter EA A e A A a IPTV A 4 Server Router Switch Switch stream Receiver gt Switch Give me multicast LA stream O Multicast a Bap Receiver D Figure 4 7 3 Multicast Service 162 Multicast Transmitter Multicast Transmitter A 1 Switch Router Switch Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 7 4 Multicast Flooding Multicast Receiver IGMP Snooping Switch Router IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Switch Switch A IGMP Snooping Switch a Figure 4 7 5 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control Multicast Receiver D 163 ES Multicast E Receiver Multicast Receiver Multicast Receiver IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of
278. t protocol Display the current source IP address Display the current source IP address wildcard mask Display the current destination IP address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask Display the current source port range Display the current destination port range Display the current flag set Display the current DSCP Display the current IP precedence Display the current ICMP Type Display the current ICMP code Edit Click to edit IPv6 based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete IPv6 based ACL entry This page allows you to bind the Policy content to the appropriate ACLs The ACL Policy screens in Figure 4 10 13 amp Figure 4 10 14 appear 290 ACL Binding O Binding Port ACL Select Select Ports IPy4 Based ACL V IPvi Based ACL Apply Figure 4 10 13 ACL Binding Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Binding Port Select port from this drop down list e ACL Select Select ACL list from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes ACL Binding Table Figure 4 10 14 ACL Binding Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e MAC ACL Display the current MAC ACL e IPv4 ACL Display the current IPv4 ACL e IPv6 ACL Display the current IPv6 ACL e Modify Click EY to edit ACL binding table parameter Click Velete delete ACL bi
279. t will treated as a high priority packet The POC Managed Switch supports eight priority level queue the queue service rate is based on the WRR Weight Round Robin and WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing alorithm The WRR ratio of high priority and low priority can be set to 4 1 and 8 1 191 4 8 2 General 4 8 2 1 QoS Properties The QoS Global Setting and Information screen in Figure 4 8 1 amp Figure 4 8 2 appear Disable Basic QoS Global Setting Apply Figure 4 8 1 QoS Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Enable or disable QoS mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes QoS Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 8 2 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Display the current QoS mode 192 4 8 2 2 QoS Port Settings The QoS Port Settings and Status screens in Figure 4 8 2 amp Figure 4 8 3 appear Port Port Settings select Ports ie Disable O Enable Disable O Enable Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 8 2 QoS Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e CoS Value Select CoS value from this drop down list e Remark CoS Disable or enable remark CoS e Remark DSCP Disable or enable remark DSCP Remark
280. ted O Protected Apply Figure 4 3 16 Protected Ports Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port List Select port number from this drop down list e Port Type Displays protected port types Protected A single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port Unprotected A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN This is the default setting Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Protected Ports Status Protected Ports Figure 4 3 17 Port Isolation Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Protected Ports Display the current protected ports e Unprotected Ports Display the current unprotected ports 98 4 3 10 EEE What is EEE EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic utilization EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered
281. temaeet Seated a dd ld 118 AO OWE TO VLAN ooo unn coat 123 bo ROT VIAN MenbDe SID 124 4 50 Protocol VLAN Group Seting E aii da 125 4 529 POTOCI MEAN POM Se IN a a ice 126 A e E va ctadsianscatslcdutieuat a ee RE 128 AS 1IFGVRP Pon Sell NO uses 130 A AZ GN AP MEANS ia e a di bs 132 ASE a A elias ee ollie ee atenolol Geo aea E asgesuseesnchesstosecommeveaeaaes 132 AO VAs VAIN SOUS X AIM la 134 4 5 t4 1 Two Separa 802 1 kg BY 2 gt ccena ee ee eee 134 4 5 14 2 VLAN Trunking between Two 802 1Q Aware Switches ccoooooooccccccnnnnncnonononanonnnnnnnnnnonononnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 137 4 6 Spanning Tree Protocol iii ici 140 AO 1 WC ONY sstectas iat ctccaw A Gane Maladude O neu uueeacanenSehacceap 140 A622 Or GIOD Al nn ese eee cored ce sett aera nett T ce sncne testes ame cokes arc esattemeecuceeses 146 BG a SH Ole Se IIL Me sate dean a A a E E ena eensceecee taste 148 46 4 A a ea a talent dl Asia raise 151 400 ST POT Selina a aio 153 4 6 6 MST Instance Ong Uan e e e ed 154 A PP PPP shaseeesieae seatedeackusaeteetace gt 157 AS A te a eee iene an a Ae el Al ake aati il adem icaelee cd 159 AT MUCAS dE ias 160 Ae ROOM Le oy tassels atest tea tue net a tind ace eu ae ee te esa sass oo ae ata guee aay a adem ee Gee 160 42 IGMP SOO DINGS ur iio ritos 162 AT 2T E A 166 4T 22 IGMP QUERES SUING ii a a ices ct bee wneieah dt eecatacelerees 168 41 23 GMP Statie OIE a A A A emanate OE 169 A072 IGMP Group Tabla dio 170 AT 23 IMPAR OMS CIN dit tdi 1
282. that is what is used The current RX column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed The current TX column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The RX and TX settings are determined by 105 Buttons Apply the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Click to apply changes LAG Port Status a Port Enable Link Flow Ctrl Flow Ctrl a al SP Duplex E Smua The page includes the following fields ass ION AO ETC CUT CTO CI CET ase f eme CU CT fo Object LAG Description Port Type Enable State Speed Duplex Flow Control Config Flow Control Status Disabled Disabled Figure 4 4 7 LAG Port Status Page Screenshot Description The LAG for the settings contained in the same row Display the current description Display the current port type Display the current enable state Display the current speed Display the current duplex mode Display the current flow control configuration Display the current flow control status 106 4 4 4 LACP Setting This page is used to configure the LACP system priority setting The LACP Setting screens in Figure 4 4 8 amp Figure 4 4 9 appear LACP setting ams a 6ss3s Apply Figure 4 4 8 LACP Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority A valu
283. the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enable after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1 X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a 218 switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached e Reauthentication Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be Period reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 30 to 65535 seconds e Quiet Period Sets time to keep silent on supplicant authentication failure e Supplicant Period Sets the interval for the supplicant to re transmit EAP request identify frame e Maximum Request The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame Retries without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes 802 1x Port Status E m m m i h GE5 802 1X Disabled EE Enabled 3600 eo GE6 802 1X Disabled e Enabled 3600 eo HE 7 Q _ p A 3 3 3 3 3 0 30 O 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 E mi fm o 902 1X Disabled Figure 4 9 6 802 1X Port Status Page
284. the Port Management folder and then the Bandwidth Utilization link Port Bandwidth Utilization Micbps Maioombps Mronmbps B Link Down Refresh period 5 sec IFG Enable Tx FE1 FE FE3 FE4 FE5 FEG FE FES GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rx FE1 FE FES FE4 FE5 FE6 FET FES GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 3 7 Port Bandwidth Utilization Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Refresh Period This shows the period interval between last and next refresh Options Mm sec E 5sec m 10sec e IFG Allow user to enable or disable this function 90 4 3 5 Port Mirroring Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provides monitoring of network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to another port where the packet can be studied lt enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The POC Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirror Application Port Mirroring Target Port Tx 101010 Rx 111000 Monitor Clien
285. the current querier stauts e Querier Version Display the current querier version e Querier IP Display the current querier IP 168 4 7 2 3 IGMP Static Group Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in above sections For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the POC Managed Switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Static multicast addresses are never aged out When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN The IGMP Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4 7 12 amp Figure 4 7 13 appear Add IGMP Static Group LO FE nm LOE E a A E 7 A r po ote En zx O LF Se S j rat gl 1 A E E g ie nm a A a um y Y Y La fi A mA 1 i k r E LTI F 1 1 y S amp w L_ k F Lat FRL r A eS S WiFi LFI La Add Figure 4 7 12 Add IGMP Static Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Group IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Ports Select port number from this drop down list Buttons Add Click to add IGMP router port entry IGMP Static Groups Figure
286. the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out e RX Frame Error The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error e RX TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e RX TLVs The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Unrecognized e RX Ageout Total The number of organizationally TLVs received 4 13 Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are 314 designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the POC Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items Cable Diagnostics Ping Test IPv6 Ping Test Trace Route 4 13 1 Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performs tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follows m if the link is established on the twisted pair
287. through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 308 Buttons Appl PPIyY Click to apply changes LLDP MED Network Policy Table Delete E Network Policy Number Application VLANID VLAN Tag L2 Priority DSCP Value Figure 4 12 11 LLDP MED Network Policy Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Network Policy Display the current network policy number Number e Application Display the current application e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e VLAN Tag Display the current VLAN tag status e L2 Priertity Display the current L2 prierity e DSCP Value Dusplay the current DSCP value Buttons Delete Click to delete LLDP MED network policy table entry 4 12 7 MED Port Setting The Port LLDP MED Configuration Port Setting Table screens in Figure 4 12 12 Figure 4 12 13 appear LLDP MED Configuration Select Optional TLVs TLVs Select Optional TLVs TLVs Apply Figure 4 12 12 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot 309 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e MED Enable Enable or disable MED configuration e MED Optional TVLs Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of advertised messages Network Policy This option advertises network policy configuration information aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of
288. timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request Set the server priority The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured Set the usage type The following modes are available E Login mM 802 1X All Click to add Radius server setting 225 Login Authentication Lists WP ness am Pont Jaca ron Key Tineout Revies Priory Dead Tine Usage Tipe Mody Figure 4 9 12 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address Display the current IP address e Auth Port Display the current auth port e Acct Port Display the current acct port e Key Display the current key e Timeout Display the current timeout e Retries Display the current retry t
289. tion Display the current community type Display the current SNMP access group s name Display the current view name Display the current access type Delete Delete the community entry 74 4 2 7 6 SNMP User Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view The entry index key is User Name The SNMPv3 User Setting screens in Figure 4 2 29 amp Figure 4 2 30 appear User Setting Privilege Authentication AS Encryption x A 1 ES f o v noauth v l 8 16 8 16 dll chars chars Add Figure 4 2 29 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e User Name e Group e Privilege Mode e Authentication Protocol e Authentication Password e Encryption Protocol Description A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 The SNMP Access Group A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are A NoAuth None authentication and none privacy a Auth Authentication and none privacy E Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry al
290. tion El TACACS Server El IP Source Gurad E AAA a Port Security E Access El DoS E E Management Access Method Strom Control 4 9 1 802 1X Overview of 802 1X Port based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to th
291. to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization Switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled 141 a From disabled to blocking Switch Blocking Listening Disable Learning Forwarding ligt ree Figure 4 6 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the R
292. tted wafer nae ref ana oo rompo Se map vena Figure 4 12 16 LLDP Port Overloading Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e Toltal Bytes Total number of bytes of LLDP information that is normally sent in a packet e Left to Send Bytes Total number of available bytes that can also send LLDP information in a packet e Status Gives the status of the TLVs 312 e Mandatory TLVs Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs were transmitted or overloaded e MED Capabilites Displays if the capabilities packets were transmitted or overloaded e MED Location Displays if the location packets were transmitted or overloaded e MED Network Policy Displays if the network policies packets were transmitted or overloaded e MED Extended Power Displays if the extended power via MDI packets were transmitted or overloaded via MDI e 802 3 TLVs Displays if the 802 3 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded e Optional TLVs If the LLDP MED extended power via MDI packets were sent or if they were overloaded e MED Inventory Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs was transmitted or overloaded e 802 1 TLVs Displays if the 802 1 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded 4 12 9 LLDP Statistics Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to general statistics for LLDP capable devices attached to the switch and for LLDP protocol messages transmitt
293. type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should exist another view entry in which view type is included and its OID subtree oversteps the excluded view entry Buttons Add Click to add a new view entry 70 View Table Status Figure 4 2 24 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields e View Name Display the current SNMP view name e Subtree OID Display the current SNMP subtree OID e OID Mask Display the current SNMP OID mask e View Type Display the current SNMP view type e Action Delete Delete the view table entry 71 4 2 7 4 SNMP Access Group Configure SNMPv3 access group on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access Group Setting screens in Figure 4 2 25 Figure 4 2 26 appear Access Group Setting Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Figure 4 2 25 SNMPv3 Access Group Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Security Model Indicates the secu
294. ues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VolP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be note
295. ueue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to IP Display the current mapping to IP Precedence Precedence 4 8 3 QoS Basic Mode 4 8 3 1 Global Settings The Basic Mode Global Settings and QoS Information screens in Figure 4 8 12 amp Figure 4 8 13 appear Basic Mode Global Settings cos s02 ip ODSCP OcCo5 802 1p DSCP OIP Precedence O None Apply Figure 4 8 12 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Set the QoS mode 200 Buttons Appl PP Y Click to apply changes Information Name Information Value QoS Informations Figure 4 8 13 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Display the current QoS mode 4 8 3 2 Port Settings The QoS Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 14 amp Figure 4 8 15 appear QoS Port Setting Trust Select Ports Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 8 14 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Trust Mode Enable or disable the trust mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 201 QoS Port Status LAI TU Figure 4 8 15 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Po
296. umber of the logical port e Interface VLAN Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode e Membership Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be 123 MO assigned to at least one group as an untagged port e PVID Display the current PVID Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes 4 5 7 Port VLAN Membership This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 5 8 appears Port VLAN Membership Table 111P Edit Figure 4 5 8 Port VLAN Membership Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Mode Display the current VLAN mode e Administrative VLANs Display the current administrative VLANs e Operational VLANs Display the current operational VLANs
297. utive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode For more detailed information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 8 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link Aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop
298. wed range is 1 to 255 Click to add a new SNMPv1 2 host entry SNMPV1 2 Host Status The page includes the following fields Object Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type Community Name UDP Port Time Out Retries Action Figure 4 2 32 SNMPv1 2 Host Status Page Screenshot Description Display the current server address Display the current SNMP version Display the current notify type Display the current community name Display the current UDP port Display the current time out Display the current retry times Delete Delete the SNMPv1 2 host entry 4 2 7 9 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv3 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 33 8 Figure 4 2 34 appear SNMPv3 Host setting Server Address Notify Type User Name UDP Port TimeOut Retries O e CI EE PE Add The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Add Server Address Notify Type User Name UDP Port Time Out Retries Figure 4 2 33 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot Description Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w lt can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Set the notify type in traps or informs Indicates the user string when send SNMP trap packet Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will se
299. wing fields Object Description e LLDP Enable Display the current LLDP status e LLDP PDU Disable Display the current LLDP PDU disable action Action e Transmission Interval Display the current transmission interval e Holdtime Multiplier Display the current holdtime multiplier e Reinitialization Delay Display the current reinitialization delay e Transmit Delay Display the current transmit delay e LLDP MED Fast Start Display the current LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Repeat Count 299 4 12 3 LLDP Port Setting Use the LLDP Port Setting to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces including whether messages are transmitted received or both transmitted and received The LLDP Port Configuration and Status screens in Figure 4 12 3 amp Figure 4 12 4 appear LLDP Port O TIN Port Select Apply Optional TLVs Selection Optional TLV Select Select Optional TLVs Apply Figure 4 12 3 LLDP Port Configuration and Optional TLVs Selection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port Select e State e Port Select e Optional TLV Select Description Select port from this drop down list Enables LLDP messages transmit and receive modes for LLDP Protocol Data Units Options El TX only E RX only E Tx RX E Disabled Select port from this drop down list Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised messages E System Name When checke
300. y changes CIST Instance Information Information Name Priority Max Hops Forward Delay Max Aqe Tx Hold Count Hello Time Information Value 32768 Figure 4 6 9 CIST Instance Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Priority Max Hop Forward Delay Max Age Tx Hold Count Hello Time Description Display the current CIST priority Display the current max hop Display the current forward delay Display the current max age Display the current Tx hold count Display the current hello time 152 4 6 5 CIST Port Setting This page allows you to configure per port CIST priority and cost The CIST Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 6 10 8 Figure 4 6 11 appear CIST Port Setting Port Select shane Aro Apply Figure 4 6 10 CIST Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e Internal Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost 0 Auto as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology
301. y frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled The 802 1X Guest VLAN setting screens in Figure 4 9 7 amp Figure 4 9 8 appear Guest VLAN Setting Guest VLAN port Setting Port Select Guest VLAN Select Ports OEnabled Disabled Apply 220 Figure 4 9 7 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Guest VLAN ID e Guest VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN Port Setting Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes Description This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4094 A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch
302. y the current bandwith for each queue Buttons I PA DRA Y Click to apply changes Information Name Information Value Figure 4 8 5 Queue Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Information Name Display the current queue method information e Information Value Display the current queue value information 4 8 2 4 CoS Mapping The CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 6 Figure 4 8 7 appear CoS to Queue Mapping Apply Figure 4 8 6 CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 195 Object e Queue e Class of Service Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Description Select Queue value from this drop down list Select CoS value from this drop down list The page includes the following fields CoS mapping Object CoS Mapping to Queue Queue Mapping to CoS Figure 4 8 7 CoS Mapping Page Screenshot Description Display the current CoS value Display the current mapping to queue Display the current queue value Display the current mapping to CoS 196 4 8 2 5 DSCP Mapping The DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 8 Figure 4 8 9 appear DSCP to Queue Mapping Select DS CP Queue to DSCP Mapping Figure 4 8 8 DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the foll

POC2502 Series User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents